1. Installation

1. Installation

1. Installation

The followings are the basic requirements to install the ADP:

1. PC - CPU 80586 or higher;

2. Memory – 64 Meg RAM or more;

3. Hardware - 60 Meg or more free space;

4. Display - VGA or SVGA. Windows with 256 color or higher,

and resolution with 800×600 or higher.

Since all the programs in the ADP have been compressed, one needs to install the software before using it.

The software is available from the following websites or your local dealers.

• http://www.hitechsite.com

• http://www.hitechsite.com.tw

1.1.

ADP 6.0 User’s Manual

1

1. Installation

Installation Procedures

Users can run the ADP software in the following Windows operating systems:

• Windows 95

• Windows 98

• Windows ME

• Windows 2000

• Windows XP

Installation Procedure:

1. Start your computer in the Windows environment.

2. Click [Start] and select [Run]. The [Run] dialog box should be appeared on the screen and select [Browse] to locate the install program “Setup.exe”. See Figure 1.

Figure 1. Run the ADP installation program

“Setup.exe” in Window

3. Click [OK] to start to install, See Figure 2.

2 ADP 6.0 User’s Manual

1. Installation

Figure 2. The ADP is preparing to install

4. Follow the instructions and specify the hard drive and the directory which the ADP will be installed to. See Figure 3.

Figure 3. The destination hard drive and the directory


3

1. Installation

5. Click [Next] to select the type of setup. See Figure 4. “Typical” is recommended for the most users. “Compact” is the program with basic options. “Custom” is the program which users can individually select the options to install and this is recommended for advanced users.

Figure 4. Select the type of setup

6. Click [Next] to begin to install. If the “Typical” option is selected, then the following dialog box will appear on the screen.

See Figure 5.


1. Installation

Figure 5. The ADP Installation

7. After the installation, the system will create the ADP icon automatically.

8. Once the installation is completed, the ADP software is in the specified directory. To launch the ADP program, simply use the mouse to click on the ADP icon.


5

1. Installation

There are several things about file conversions and upgrades to be noted:

ADP 6.0 can open an *.V3F file designed by ADP 3.x. To open an

*.P3F file designed by ADP 2.x, one needs to open the file in ADP 3.x first and save it as an *.V3F file. Then open the file in ADP 6.0.

Finally, one cannot open the files designed by ADP 6.0 in ADP 3.x.

1.3. HMI Models Upgrades

There are several upgrades regarding the applicable models of HMI in

ADP 6.0:

The followings are the applicable HMI models in ADP 6.0:

PWS3261,PWS3261N,PWS6300,PWS6500,PWS6600,PWS6600

Color,PWS6600N,PWS6600N-Color,AP1600,AP1600-

Color,AP1600N,AP1600N-Color and SoftPanel.

The following HMI models are not applicable in ADP 6.0:

PWS500S,PWS500S-PLC,PWS700T,PWS700X,PWS1711,PWS1711-

Color,PWS1760,PWS3160/3260,PWS2100,PWS3700,and PWS3760.

If a file is designed for an HMI model which is not applicable in ADP

6.0, then ADP 6.0 will automatically upgrade the older version of model to an updated version of model once the file is opened. The conversions of these HMI models are shown below:

Models are applicable in ADP 6.0.

Models are NOT applicable in

ADP 6.0

PWS6600S-S

PWS6600S-S

PWS1700-Mono

PWS1700-B/W

PWS6600C-S

PWS1700-Color

PWS6600C-S-Ladder

PWS6600S-S

PWS1711-Color-Ladder

PWS1711-Mono


1. Introduction

PWS6600S-S-Ladder

PWS6600C-P

PWS6600C-P-Ladder

PWS3261

PWS3261

PWS3261

PWS1711-Mono-Ladder

PWS1760

PWS1760-Ladder

PWS2100

PWS3000/3100

PWS3160/3260

PWS3261-Ladder

PWS3261

PWS3160/3260-Ladder

PWS3700

PWS3261

PWS3261-Ladder

PWS3760

PWS3760-Ladder

PWS6300

PWS6300-Ladder

PWS500S

PWS500S-PLC

PWS6500

PWS6600S-P

PWS700T

PWS700X

Note also that not all features provided by the ADP are applicable on every HMI model. For the complete details on those ADP features and the applicable models, please refer to Appendix A.


7

2. Instructions

Microsoft Windows

TM

is undoubtedly the main PC operating environment nowadays. ADP is also designed to make full use of the Windows environment and adopts the concept of “What You See is What You

Get.” Users can immediately see their designed objects on a PC screen with their specified attributes such as font size, color, location of objects, picture, scale, frame, and so on. What a user sees on a PC screen will be the same as those displayed on a Workstation. Furthermore, ADP utilizes the principles of object-oriented design to implement the drag-and-drop editing. Users can conveniently drag objects into another location or change shapes and sizes with a mouse as they wish.

8 ADP 6.0 User’s Manual

2. Instructions

Title Bar

2.1. Introduction

Figure 6 illustrates the major bars and tool boxes in the ADP program

environment.

Menu Bar

Toolbar

Window Title

Window

Workspace

Toolbox

Figure 6. ADP Program Environment Overview

Title Bar:

The Title Bar shows the windows name and the directory of the current application. Example: C:\MyAPP\V6.0 \TEST1.V6F.

If an application file has not been saved, “untitled” will be displayed in the Title Bar.

Menu Bar:

There are 13 menus in the Menu Bar; they are [File], [Edit], [View],

[Screen], [Draw], [Object], [Library], [Application], [Tool], [Options],

[LadderPlus], [Window] and [Help].

Tool Bar:

Users can create an ADP program simply by clicking the icons on the

Tool Bar. This feature also helps new users to learn the software quickly and easily.

Window Workspace


9

Status Bar

2. Instructions

This is the area to design a Screen. The objects or data created in this area will actually be displayed on an HMI.

In the following sections, we will talk about the function, application, and usage for each of the commands and menus in much more details.


2. Instructions

2.2. Menu

The main purpose of the [File] menu is to manage the files designed by

ADP.

2.2.1.

[New]

This command allows users to create a new application and specify its properties such as [Application Name], [Panel/Workstation], [Controller/PLC], [Printer], [Multi-lingual Support], [Control Block], [Status

Block] and so on.

To create a new application, select [File]/[New]. The [New Application’s Properties] dialog box should be appeared on the screen. See

Figure 7.

Figure 7. The [New Application’s Properties] Dialog Box

The followings are the basic properties a user needs to set up for a new application:


2. Instructions

• In the [Application Name] box, enter the name of an application.

• In the [Panel/Workstation] list, select the model of a Workstation.

• In the [Controller/PLC] list, select the type of PLC which a

Workstation will communicate with.

Please refer to Section 2.9 [Application] and Section 2.9.1.2 [Connection]

for more details.

2.2.2. [Open] and [Close]

[Open] allows users to open an existing application. The compatible

format of a file includes *.V6F, *.V4F and *.V3F. See Figure 8.

[Close] allows users to close an application.

Figure 8. The [Open] dialog box

ADP 6.0 can open an *.V3F file designed by ADP 3.x. To open an

*.P3F file designed by ADP 2.x, one needs to open the file in ADP 3.x first and save it as an *.V3F file. Then open the file in ADP 6.0.


11

2. Instructions

2.2.3. [Save] and [Save as]

[Save]: Saves an existing application to replace the previous copy with the new copy.

[Save As]: Saves a new or existing application with a new name. See

Figure 9.

Figure 9. The [Save as] Dialog Box

2.2.4.

[Print]

An application file can be printed for the purposes of planning, management or storage.

Select [File]/[Print] and the [Print Options] dialog box should be

appeared on the screen. See Figure 10. There are three options avail-

able: “Workstation Setup”, “Screen Overview” and “Screen Image.”

The function is not applicable on every HMI model; please refer to

Appendix A. - Table of the ADP 6.0 Features and the HMI Models for the complete details.


2. Instructions

Figure 10. The [Print Option] Dialog Box

The [Print] options:

• “Workstation Setup”: Prints the data of Workstation such as the

PLC type, configuration setup and the details of logging buffer.

See Figure 11.

• “Screen Overview”: Prints the image of a screen with the PLC location of each object. See Figure 12.

• “Screen Image”: Prints the image of a screen without the PLC locations. See Figure 13.

Other options：

• [Copies]: Specify the number of copies to print.

• [Range]: Only available for the “Screen Overview” and

“Screen Image” options.


13

2. Instructions

Application name: Myapp001 page 1 12/22/1998 17:31

___________________________________________________________

Workstation Type : PWS3160/3260

PLC Type : Modicon 984 (RTU)

Printer Type : EPSON Stylus Color II

Default Startup Screen : 1

Default Data Format : BCD

Control Block Address : 40100 Size : 2

Status Block Address : 40200

Logging Buffers

Record Stamp Auto Triggered Time

# Source Address Size Total Time Date Stop By Interval

1 40500 4 3000 Yes No No Timer 5

2 0 0 No No No PLC 0











Figure 11. An Example of the “Workstation Setup” Print Option

Figure 12. An Example of the “Screen Overview” Print Option


2. Instructions

Figure 13. An Example of the “Screen Image” Print Option

2.2.5.

[Upload Application] and [Download Application From]

[Upload Application] is to upload an application from a Workstation to

a PC and the file will be saved as *.AF6. See Figure 14.

[Download Application From] is to download a program from a PC to a Workstation and the format of the file is *.AF6.

Figure 14. The [Upload Application] Dialog Box


15

2. Instructions

2.2.6. [Upload Recipes] and [Download Recipes]

[Upload Recipes] is to upload recipes from the Workstation to a PC

and the file will be saved as *.RCP. See Figure 15.

[Download Recipes] is to download recipes from a PC to a Workstation and the format of the file is *.RCP.

These functions are not applicable on every HMI model; please refer to


Figure 15. The [Upload Recipes] Dialog Box

2.2.7.

[Reconstruct Source]

This function allows users to directly reconstruct a source file of an application via uploading the application file from an HMI to a PC.

[Reconstruct Source] is to reconstruct an uploaded application file from *.AA6 to *.V6F. The application will be displayed on a PC and the source file (*.V6F) can be saved for the purposes of future editing and application.

In ADP 6.0 or later, an application downloaded to an HMI is “rebuiltable”; [Reconstruct Source] enables a user to directly reconstruct a source file of an uploaded application on an HMI from *.AA6 to

*.V6F.

The function is not applicable on every HMI model; please refer to



2. Instructions

Steps to reconstruct a source file from *.AA6 to *V6F:

(Suppose that an application has been uploaded on the HMI.)

1. On the HMI, select [Upload Application]. In ADP, select

[File]/[Upload Application]. The HMI will upload the application to the PC and the file is saved as *.AF6. See below.

2. Next, select [File]/[Reconstruct Source] and open the application file (*.C64 or *.AA6). Thus the application should be appeared on the PC and a user can save the source file as *.V6F for future use. See Figure 16.


17

2. Instructions

Figure 16. The [Reconstruct Source] Dialog Box

2.2.8.

[Exit]

[Exit] is to close and leave ADP.

If any changes have been made, the following dialog box will appear

on the screen to ask a user to save the changes or leave. See Figure 17.

Figure 17. The [Exit] Dialog Box


2. Instructions

2.3. Edit

The main purposes of the [Edit] menu include the common editing functions of ADP screen and objects. If a user does not open any image, all of light-colored items in the [Edit] are unavailable.

User can click the icons on the tool bar to speed edit or operate the elements on the list quickly by right-click the mouse.

The following sections will explain the functions more specific to the

ADP software.

Figure 18. [Edit] Menu

2.3.1.

[Duplicate]

Allows a user to make multiple copies of an object and simultaneously

increment the corresponding addresses. See Figure 19.


19

2. Instructions

Figure 19. The [Duplicate] Dialog Box

• [Number of Copies]

• [Columns]：Specify number of columns to duplicate.

• [Rows]：Specify number of rows to duplicate.

• [Spacing]

• [Horizontal]：Specify how many pixels to space duplicate objects horizontally.

• [Vertical]：Specify how many pixels to space duplicate objects vertically.

• [Address Incremen]

• [X-Direction]：The address of the same dynamic objects increase from left to right.

• [Y-Direction]：The address of the same dynamic objects increase from up to down.


2. Instructions

Figure 20. [Duplicate]

2.3.2.

[Find/Replace Address]

The main function is to find or edit the address in designed program; and replace the found address. While select [Edit]/[Find/Replace Ad-

dress], the dialog box will display on the screen as Figure 21.

Figure 21. The [Find/Replace Address] Dialog Box

Enter the address in the blank space or select from drop-down list directly (Ex：D100); then press the [Find] button for search. The [Result] index tab displays a detailed list in accordance with the designated

range and address. See Figure 22.


21

2. Instructions

Figure 22. [Result] Index Tab

Select [Replace] button to replace the address to a new one. The function of [Replace] button is to replace the objects address one by one; select [Replace All] to replace all of the objects address at a time. See

Figure 23.

Figure 23. [Replace] Index Tab

I. Find Screen Address

Select [Type]/[Screen] to find the screen address. See Figure 24.


2. Instructions

Figure 24. Find [Screen] Address

• [Range]：

♦ [Current screen]：Only find the current open screen.

♦ [All screen]：Finds the entire screens in application program.

• [Option]：

♦ [Match whole word only]：The findings match the entry address entrirely. If this option is not selected, the initial findings match the entry address including the partial and entire match.

♦ [Open attribute dailog]：To display the attribute of object by double-clicks on the list of [Result] index tab. If this option is not selected, the attribute of the object dialog box is unavailable.

II. Find Macro Address

Select [Type]/[Marcro] to find the macro address. See Figure 25.


23

2. Instructions

Figure 25. Find [Macro] Address

• [Range]：

♦ [Current macro]：Finds current macro.

♦ [Current screen macros]：Finds the current image/screen macros.

♦ [Sub-macros]：Finds entire sub-macros.

♦ [All screens’ macros]：Finds entire image/screen macros.

♦ [Application macros]：Finds three types of macros in [Application] menu.

♦ [All macros]：Finds entire macros.

• [Option]：

♦ [Match whole word only]：The fidings match the entry address entirely. If this option is not selected, the initial findings match the entry address including the partial and entire match.

2.3.3.

[Decompose Shape]

This function is mainly to decompose the graph created by [Shape] in the [Draw] command and each decomposed graph can be modified and

edited. See Figure 26 and Figure 27.


2. Instructions

Figure 26. Select Graph in [Draw]/[Shape] for Edit

Figure 27. posed Object

Select [Edit]/[Decompose] to Modify Each Decom-

2.3.4.

[Align] and [Make Same Size]

These two functions are mainly to align or make same size the designed objects. (Ex: Indicator, Moving Sign, Message Display, Lines, and so on) The followings are the steps for using these two commands：

1. Press [Shift] and left-click on all objects which be aligned or made same size. See Figure 28.


25

2. Instructions

Figure 28. Step 1

2. Left-click on the master object, then four corners of this master object should be shaded. See Figure 29.

Figure 29. Step 2

3. Select the command in [Align] or [Make Same Size] to make the other objects align or make same size with the

‘master’ object. See Figure 30.


2. Instructions

Figure 30. Step 3

2.3.5.

[Nudge] and [Layer]

[Nudge]: Choose the objects for slight shift and adjustment toward appointed direction.

[Align]: If there are more than two objects, users can move the objects

up-down layer. See Figure 31; Figure 32.


27

2. Instructions

Figure 31. [Layer]/[Bring to Next] Command Makes Rectangle

Graph Top

Figure 32. [Layer]/[Send to Previous] Makes the Rectangle Graph

Buttom


2. Instructions

2.3.6. [Group] 及 [Ungroup]

If there are more than two graphs or objects in the screen for edit; frame (Shift + Left-click) all of objects which be moved and then select [Group]. All of the framed objects will be move to appointed posi-

tion together as a single unit. See Figure 33.

[Ungroup] is to upgroup the selected group of objects.

Figure 33. Select [Edit]/[Group] to Move the Selected Objects Together

2.3.7.

[Object Attributes]

User can edit the content of the objects or modify data location and formats associated with PLC.

Note that different objects (ex: Push Button, Indicator, Moving Sign,

Massage Display, and so on) have their own object attributes. See

Figure 34 and Figure 35.

Left-click on the object and then select [Edit]/[Object Attributes], the dialog box will be displayed on the screen;or double left-click on the objects directly as well. For the properties which are not explained in this section, please refer to the section

2.7 Object .


29

2. Instructions

Figure 34. The [ON/Off Button] Object Attributes Dialog Box

Figure 35. The [Moving Sign] Object Attributes Dialog Box


2. Instructions

2.3.8. [State/Text Management]

The main purposes of the [State/Text Management] include editing text, color, type revealed in designed object.Simutaneously, this object also supply users with easier operation such as the functions of copy,

modify, line feed, and so on. See Figure 36.

Figure 36. The [State/Text Management] Dialog Box

2.3.9.

Focal Mark Style

As select [Focal Mark Style], there are five types for selection: [None],

[Still Lines],[Circulating Lines],[Circulating Dots],[Swaying Dots].

See Figure 37.

This function is not limited by any application images or files, it will modify edit environment in ADP.


31

2. Instructions

Figure 37. The [Focal Mark Style] list

Figure 38 is an illustration of objects with focal mark:

[None]

[Still Lines]、

[Circulating Lines]

[Circulating Dots]、

[Swaying Dots]

Figure 38. An Illustration of objects with focal mark

2.3.10. Attributes

This function is easier to edit objects simantaneously with common attributes. User can modify attributes of objects which are in a screen at a time.

First, select the objects to be edited at a time. The dialog box of


2. Instructions

[Focal Mark Style] will be displayed on the screen by double-click on

one of objects. See Figure 39.

Figure 39. Open [Common Attributes] Dialog Box

User can edit the common attributes of selected objects such as loca-

tion/dimension, outlook, and text. See Figure 40.


33

2. Instructions

Figure 40. The [Common Attributes] Dialog Box

Option:

• [Language]：Specify language of the selected objects to reveal.

• [Apply to State]：Specify the state of the selected objects. User can edit different states in this list.

• [Location/Dimention] Block：Specify the width and height of the objects. Press [Apply] button to modify.

• [Outlook] Block：Specify the outlook of selected objects.

[Shape ID]：Specify the shape of different objects. While press [Select] button, the dialog box will be appeared on the screen as Figure 41.

While the selection have made, the dialog box will be appeared on the

screen as Figure 42. Then, a user can select next objectes to design.


2. Instructions

Figure 41. Specify the Shape of Object

Figure 42. Select Objects to Be Designed

♦ [Outline Color]：Specify the outline color of all the selected objects.

♦ [Background Color]：Specify the background color of all the selected objects.

♦ [Pattern]：Specify the pattern of all selected objects which can


35

2. Instructions

be set.

♦ [Pattern Color]：Specify the pattern color of all selected objects which can be set.

• [Text] Block：

♦ [Font]：Specify the font of the text to different objects. While select [Selection] button, the dialog box will be appeared as

Figure 43. User can specify the font of text to different types of

objects. Remember to press [Apply] button for set up.

Figure 43. Specify the Font of the Text to Objects

♦ [Color]：Specify the color of the text to all selected objects.

♦ [Alignment]：Specify the alignment type of the text to all selected objects.

♦ [Underlined]：Specify the text of all selected objects unferlined or not.

♦ [Contents]：Specify the contents of the text to all selected

♦ objects. Remember to press [Apply] for set up.


2. Instructions

2.4. Menu

The main purposes of the [View] menu include the managing functions of “whole screen”, “whole screen with I/O labels”, “five language selections”, “zoom in/out” and “eight kinds of toolbars”.

2.4.1.

[Whole Screen] and [Whole Screen With I/O Lables]

[Whole Screen]: To view the whole screen of all edited objects with whole screen. User can return to previous view by left-click.

[Whole Screen With I/O Lables]: To view the whole screen with dynamic objects with write/read addresses on the top of left side dis-

played. User can return to the previus view by left-click. See Figure 44.

Figure 44. The Displayed Image of [Whole Screen With I/O

Lables]

ADP 6.0 User’s Manual 37

2. Instructions

2.4.2.

[Language 1-5]

There are five languages for user to switch ,please follow the steps below to setup [Language] command：

1. Select [Application]/[Workstation Setup]. The [Application Properties] dialog box will appear on the screen. See

Figure 45.

2. On the [Gerneral] tab, check the [Multi-lingual

Support] box to start setup. See Figure 45.

[Number of Languages]: Specify the number of languages to application program needed, there are five languages for selection.

[Select Language]: Specify the languages for use.

[Startup Language]: Specify the startup language to display on the screen open. User can select on the [View] menu directly for language switch of designed screen later.

Figure 45. The [Application Properties] Dialog Box


2. Instructions

2.4.3.

[Zoom In], [Normal] and [Zoom Out]

[Zoom in]: To enlarge the image size by percentage selected 150%,

175%, 200%, 250%.

[Normal]: To adjust the image size to actual size of the screen.

[Zoom Out]: To narrow the image size by percentage selected 75%,

50%, 25%.

2.4.4.

Toolbar

There are eight kinds of toolbars on the [View] menu. A User can decide to display the toolbars for quick-operation or not. The toolobars are shown as the following：

[Standard Toolbar]:

[Edit Toolbar]:

[Draw Toolbar]:


[Basic Object

Toolbar]:

[Text Toolbar]:

[Bitmap Toolbar]:

[Monitor

Toolbar]:

[Ladder

Toolbar]:

2. Instructions


2. Instructions

2.5. Menu

The main purposes of [Screen] menu are to name, number, edit and manage screens. The following sections will explain these commands in details.

2.5.1.

[New Screen]

Select to create a new screen.

In the [Name] blank, enter name for a new screen. Also, in the [Num-

ber] blank, enter screen number. See Figure 46.

Figure 46. The dialog box of [Create New Screen]

2.5.2.

[Screen Manager]

The functions of the [Screen Manager] command are to display all of the application files in detail view or thumbnail view convient a user to search, modify, edit, and so on. Select [Screen]/[Screen Manager] or click directly，the whole screen of [Screen Manager] will be dis-

played in the middle of window or minimized in left-side, See Figure

48.

In [Screen Manager] windows, click the no. or name to display the selected screen. If a user wants to open the image, just click the left key of mouse twice.

[Screen Manager] icons provide functions of new screen, screen properties, edit, and management convenient for a user to operation.

The following will explain those icons; See below:


2. Instructions

Figure 47. [Screen Manager]

•

[Dock]: The window of [Screen Manager] will be minimized in the left side, See below. In the window of [Dock], the icons are simplized to four below in the [Screen Manager]:

[Undock] is to return the window of [Screen Manager] to whole screen in the middle side; [Close Screen Manager] is to close the window of [Screen Manager]; [Detail View] and [Thumbnail View] are different ways to display the screen data.


2. Instructions

The window of [Screen

Manager]

•

[New Screen]: To open a new screen with [No.] and

[Name]. A new screen will be appeared as below.

New Screen

•

[Screen Properties]: To specify the screen properties in the

dialog box of [Screen Properties]; please refer to Section 2.5.8.

[Properties] for the complete details.


2. Instructions

•

[Open Screen]: To open and display the selected images and the window of [Screen Manager] will be minimized to the bottom. A User can open the selected image by double-click as well.

[Cut Screen], [Copy Screen], [Paste Screen], [Delete

Screen]: To edit the selected screens. Moreover, a user can get the popup menu by right-click for the selections of edit operation. Press Leftclick + Ctrl key to edit several screens together; See below.

•

[View Recycle Bin]: To list all of the deleted screens marked with red color. Right-click on the screen list; and then select [Restore] from the displayed list, See below. Re-click

can return to the previous window of the [Screen Manager].


2. Instructions

•

[Select Language]: To specify the language displayed in the screen, see below.

Figure 48. Screen displayed by “Language 1”(English)


2. Instructions

Figure 49. Screen displayed by “Language 2” (Traditional Chinese)

•

[Detail View]: To view the detail data of screens in list.

See Figure 50.

•

[Thumbnail View]: To view all of the screens in thumbnail; See below.


2. Instructions

Thumbnail View

On the [Screen Manager], select the [Detail View] button. The detailed data will be listed in the table including five columns: [No.], [Name],

[Size], [Compilation] and [Optimization]. While click the headline, the data will be listed in increasesd or decreased order such as numeral

order, dimentional order, and so on. See Figure 50.

Screen no. in numeral order

Figure 50. [No.] in numeral order


2. Instructions

[Screen Manager] also can help a user manage and edit the screen objects with convenience and efficiency. If the data in these columns should be modified, a user can click [Screen Properties] on the toolbar and modify the the screen properties in the displayed dialog box. (Or click right key of the mouse for the [Screen Properties] selec-

tion) See Figure 51; See Figure 52, See Figure 53.

Take notice of [Compilation] and [Optimization] columns, a user can decide to check [Compilation] or not; or setup in the dialog box of

[Screen Properties] as well, See Figure 53. A user can decide to check

[Optimization] or not to perform the block optimized while compila-

tion; or setup in the dialog box of [Screen Properties]. See Figure 53.

For the dialog box of [Screen Properties], please refer to Section 2.5.8

[Screen Properties] for the complete details.

Figure 51. Select [Screen Properties]


2. Instructions

Figure 52. Modify the screnn properties


2. Instructions

Figure 53. Modify the screen properties

2.5.3.

[Close Screen]

Close the current existing screen.

2.5.4.

[Cut Current Screen], [Copy Current Screen] and [Delete Current Screen]

[Cut Current Screen]: Select this command to cut the executive screen and then paste it on others.

[Copy Current Screen]: Select this command to copy the excutive screen.

[Delete Current Screen]: Select this command to delete the excutive screen.


2. Instructions

2.5.5.

[Cut Screen], [Copy Screen] and [Delete Screen]

Note that these three commands are only applicable on [Screen Man-

ager] which is minimized to the right side of the window.

[Cut Screen]: Select this command to cut the selected screens and then paste them on others.

[Copy Screen]: Select this command to copy the selected screens.

[Delete Screen]: Select this command to delete the selected screens.

2.5.6.

[Paste Screen]

Paste the screens which are cut and copied.

2.5.7.

[OPEN Macro]、[CLOSE Macro] and [CYCLIC Macro]

These three Macros enable Workstation to execute data initialization, display control, and internal register or contact initialization. Once select these commands, the workstation will display the edit screen.

See Figure 54.

Figure 54. The [OPEN Macro] Edit Screen

[OPEN Macro]: OPEN Macro is executed when the screen is commanded to be opened. A screen is not displayed until the OPEN Macro is executed completely. There is one OPEN Macro in one screen.

[CLOSE Macro]: CLOSE Macro is executed when the screen is commanded to be closed. A screen is not erased until the CLOSE


2. Instructions

Macro is executed completely. There is one CLOSE Macro in one screen.

[CYCLIC Macro]: CYCLIC Macro is excuted cyclically when the screen is displayed. The Workstaion stops execting the Macro when it encounters an End command or reaches the end of the macro.

Please refer to Chapter 8 Macro for complete details.

2.5.8. [Screen Properties]

The function of [Screen Properties] command is to display the properties of current screen including [Genernal], [Screen Background Style]

and [Read Block] tabs. See Figure 55.

Figure 55. The [Screen Properties] Dialog Box

• [Screen Number]: Specify the number of the current screen.


2. Instructions

• [Included in the compilation]: Check this option to compile the selected screen or not. This feature is convenient screen editing but unnecessary to a draft screen.

• [Screen Name]: Enter name for a current screen.

• [Screen Update and Key function]: Specify the types of screen update.

• [Need a base screen]: Check this option for a base screen. A base screen can be the background of various screens.

• [This screen is a sub-screen]: Check this option to display the selected screen as a sub-screen. A user can design the width, height, location and buttons of a sub-screen in this block. (The maximum width=180; height=160).

For the steps of a sub-screen design, please refer to Section 2.5.8.5

Sub-screen

.

• [Printed Area]: Specify the area to print. Note that this feature is not applicable on some models without PRINTER PORT.

• [Slide-out Menu]: Specify the slide-out menu of the screen.

I. Filled With Pattern

Select [Pattern], the tab will be shown as below:


2. Instructions

Figure 56. The [Screen Background Style] Tab – Pattern

• [Pattern]：Select the pattern of screen background

• [Pattern Color]：Select the color of the selected pattern.

• [Background Color]：Select the background color.

II. Filled With Bitmap

Select [Bitmap], the tab will be shown as below:


2. Instructions

Figure 57. The [Screen Background Style] Tab – Bitmap

Select the bitmap from drop-down list, there are two filling methods:

• [Stretch]：To display the bitmap entirely on a whole screen.

Select this option; the bitmap could be enlarged to match the designed screen. See below.


2. Instructions

• [Tile] ： To display the dulplicate bitmaps ranked on the designed screen. Each bitmap keeps original size. See below.


2. Instructions

Figure 58. The [Read Block] Tab

The function of [Read Block] tab is to specify register block address, on/off block address, size (in word) and refresh rate.

• [Register Block Address]: Specify the register block address in accord with PLC. A screen can be specified five register addresses at most.

• [On/Off Block Address]: Specify the On/Off block address. A screen can be specified five register addresses at most.

• [Size]: Specify the size of block.

• [Refresh Rate]: Provide “Normal”,”Fast” and “On Unchanged by Operator” for selection.

♦ “Normal”: Read data in normal speed of PLC.


2. Instructions

♦ “Fast”: Read data in double-quick of “Normal” speed. Subject to the same time, “Fast” be two-times more than “Normal” in reading data.

♦ “On Unchanged by Operator”: Enable users to change the value on HMI but unchange the value in PLC

• Optmization: Check this option to merge adjancent data into block. Note that the data address of PLC is recommended to continuity as to well communication with PLC.

Figure 59. The [Auxiliary Keys] Tab

The main function of [Auxiliary Keys] is to design the attributes of external button. The buttons definded in [Auxiliary Keys] tab is only available for the current screen. If a user defines “F1” key as screen ‘5’ to screen ‘1’, this feature is only available on screen ‘5’.

Press [Function] key, the function assignment dialog box will be

appeared in windows. See Figure 60.


2. Instructions

Figure 60. The [Function Assignment] Dialog Box

Select [Application]/[Common Keys] to define the auxiliary keys

which are available on all of screens. Please refer to Section 2.9.4.

[Common Keys] .

Note that this function is not applicable on all HMI models; please refer to Appendix A. - Table of the ADP 6.0 Features and the HMI

Models .

2.5.8.5. Sub-screen

A sub-screen is a screen that is smaller than the usual screen. The

Workstaion displays a sub-screen in the center of the screen without destroying the existing display and adds a raised frame to it automatically.

The following are the steps to create a sub-screen:

1. Create a new screen; enter the screen name and number.

2. Open the [Screen Properties] dialog box and check the

[This screen is a sub-screen] box.

3. Enter the width and height of the sub-screen.

4. Specify the position of sub-screen display (shown on the display center or appointed specific postion). See below.


2. Instructions

Figure 61. Modify the attributes of sub-screen

5. After press [Enter], the screen will be minimized to specified size. See below.

Figure 62. Sub-screen


2. Instructions

A base screen is a screen which may be used as a template for a many different screens. Once edit a base screen, all of the same base screens in application will be changed at the same time.

The following are the steps to create a base screen:

6. Create a base screen first. See below.

Figure 63. Base Screen

7. Select [Screen]/[[Properties] to create a new screen

(screen-6). Then check the [Need a Base Screen] box and specify a base screen (screen-5) in the [Screen Properties] dialog box. See below.


2. Instructions

Figure 64. Specify a base screen

8. Specify a base screen (screen-5) displayed on the current screen (screen-6). See below.


2. Instructions

Figure 65. Base screen displayed on current screen


2. Instructions

To strengthen the display of your designed objects, it is often to draw a rectangle, a line or a scale to label its data. This will help users to read and take note of the data.

The function of geometric shapes is only the static shapes irrelative to

PLC dynamic data.

Geometric Shape Button

Dot

Function draw a dot

Section

2.6.1.1. [Dot]

Line

Horizontal Line

Vertical

Connected Lines

Free Form

Rectangle

Solid Rectangle

Parallelogram

Solid

Parallelogram

Circle

Solid Circle

Ellipse

Solid Ellipse draw a line

2.6.1.2. [Line],[Horizontal Line] and [Vertical Line]

draw a horizontal line


draw a vertical line


connect the lines with mouse movement

2.6.1.3. [Connected Lines] and

[Free Form]

connected lines and curves with mouse movement draw a rectangle

2.6.1.3. [Connected Lines] and

[Free Form]

2.6.1.4. [Rectangle] and [Solid

Rectangle]

draw a solid rectangle

2.6.1.4. [Rectangle] and [Solid

Rectangle]

draw a parallelogram

2.6.1.5. [Parallelogram] and

[Solid Parallelogram]

draw a solid parallelogram draw a circle draw a solid circle

2.6.1.5. [Parallelogram] and

[Solid Parallelogram]

2.6.1.6. [Circle],[Solid

Circle],[Ellipse] and [Solid

Ellipse]



Ellipse]

draw a ellipse



Ellipse]

draw a solid ellipse




Acr

Pie

Solid Pie

Polygon

Solid Polygon

Text

True Type Text

Bitmap

Frame/Edge

Scale

Table

Shape

2. Instructions

draw a acr

Ellipse]

2.6.1.7. [Acr],[Pie] and [Solid

Pie]

draw a pie draw a solid pie


Pie]


Pie]

draw a polygon static text display and design

2.6.1.8. [Polygon] and [Solid

Polygon]

draw a solid polygon

2.6.1.8. [Polygon] and [Solid

Polygon]

2.6.2.1. [Static Text]

similar with static text (only applicable on Softpanel)

2.6.2.2. [True Type Text]

display the bitmap

2.6.2.3. [Bitmap]

draw a frame/edge

2.6.3.1. [Frame/Edge]

draw a scale

2.6.3.2. [Scale]

draw a table display the shape

2.6.3.3. [Table]

2.6.4. [Shape]


2. Instructions

The following sections are to explain the objects with the same attributes.

2.6.1. Geometric Shape

Geometric shapes includes [Dot],[Line],[Horizontal Line],[Vertical

Line],[Connected Lines],[Free Form],[Rectangle],[Solid Rectangle],[Parallelogram],[Solid Parallelogram],[Circle],[Solid Circle],[Ellipse],[Solid Ellipse],[Acr],[Pie],[Solid Pie],[Polygon] and

[Solid Polygon].

Double-click on the object or click right key for the option [Object

Attributes]. The dialog box which is correspondant with the object will

be appeared. See Figure 66.

Figure 66. The [Rectangle] Dialog Box

2.6.1.1. [Dot]

A user can specify [Type], [Color] and [Frame] in the dot dialog box.

See Figure 67.


2. Instructions

Figure 67. Draw a Dot


Figure 68 is an illustration of [Line], [Horizontal Line] and [Vertical

Line].

Line

Horizontal Line

Vertical Line

Figure 68. Line, Horizontal Line and Vertical Line


2. Instructions

A user can specify the [Type], [Color], [Arrows], [Style] in the line,

horizontal line and vertical line dialog box. See Figure 69.

Figure 69. Draw a Line with Arrows

[Connected Lines] is to connect lines with the movement of the mouse cursor. If a user presses left mouse button once then moves cursor elsewhere on screen, a straight line will be drawn between the two points. This will continue until a user clicks right key of mouse.

[Free Form] is to connect the lines and curves by holding down left mouse button while scrolling mouse the cursor follows mouse movement. This will continue until a user clicks right key of mouse


2. Instructions

Connected Lines

Free Form

Figure 70. Connected Lines and Free Form

A user can specify [Style], [Color], [Arrows] and [Profile] in con-

nected lines and free form dialog box. See Figure 71.

Figure 71. Draw Connected Lines with Arrows


2. Instructions

2.6.1.4. [Rectangle] and [Solid Rectangle]

Figure 72 is an illustration of rectangle and solid rectangle.

Rectangle

Solid Rectangle

Figure 72. Rectangle and Solid Rectangle

A user can specify [Style], [Frame], and [Profile] in the rectangle dia-

log box. Figure 73 is a rectangle which is clipped with specified [cor-

ner].


2. Instructions

Figure 73. Draw a Clipped Rectangle

[Parallelogram] is to draw a paeallelogram by holding down left mouse button to draw one side. This side will continue until a user click left key of the mouse. Then, drag this side to configure a rectangle until a

user click right key of mouse. See Figure 74.

Drag one side to create a parallelogram

Drag one side to create a solid parallelogram

Parallelogram

Solid Parallelogram

Figure 74. Draw a Parallelogram

A user can specify the attributes of rectangle in [Border] and [Profile]; and specify the attributes of solid rectangle in [Border], [Fill] and

[Profile]. See Figure 75.


2. Instructions

Figure 75. Draw a Parallelogram

Figure 76 is an illustration of a circle and an ellipse.

Holding down the left key mouse button to drag a circle until right-click

Figure 76. Draw a Circle and Ellipse

A user can specify the attributes of circle in [Border] and [Profile]; and specify the attributes of ellipse in [Border], [Fill] and [Profile]. See

Figure 77.


Holding down the left key mouse button to drag an ellipse until right-click

2. Instructions

Figure 77. The [Circle] dialog box

2.6.1.7. [Acr]、[Pie] and [Solid Pie]

[Acr] is to draw a circle by holding down left mouse button. This will continue until configure desied size by right-click. Left-click for a radius display, a user can drag radius to configure a desired acr until re-

click left key. See Figure 78. A user can adjust the width and height to

configure an acr of an ellipse. See Figure 79.

The way to draw a pie and a solid pie is similar to [Acr]. The difference of a pie from an acr is two lines connected between the two-side

of an acr and center. See Figure 79.

Hold down left mouse button to dra w an acr

Figure 78. Draw a Acr


2. Instructions

Acr (Circle)

Acr (Ellipse)

Pie

Solid Pie

Figure 79. Acr, Pie and Solid Pie

The acr, pie and solid pie dialog box are the same; See Figure 80.

Check [Arc] box to draw an arc; Check [Fill] box to draw a solid arc and secify [Pattern] there; Check [Arc] box and adjust the width and height in [Profile] to configure an arc of ellipse.

Figure 80. The [Pie/Arc Attributes] Dialog Box


2. Instructions

2.6.1.8. [Polygon] and [Solid Polygon]

[Polygon] is to draw sides of a polygon with the movement of the mouse cursor and connect the lines between the starting point and the

terminal point with shortest distance; See Figure 80. The way to draw a

polygon is dragging the mouse cursor until left-click on the turning point and right–click to be a polygon.

Polygon

Solid Polygon

Figure 81. Polygon and Solid Polygon

A user can specify the attributes of polygon in [Border] and [Profile] and the attributes of solid polygon in [Border], [Fill] and [Profile]. See

Figure 81.


2. Instructions

Figure 82. The [Polygon Attributes] Dialog box

2.6.2.

[Static Text] ,[True Type Text] and [Bitmap]

The [Static Text] provides users with the choices of text, font, color, reading order, alignment and frame/edge. Double-click on the object,

the [Static Text] dialog box as in Figure 82 will be appeared on the

screen.

• [Text] Tab: Enter text on the [Text] block. There are sixteen types of fonts in all for users to specify as Figure 82. A user can

specify the font, sixteen types in all. For the properties which

are not explained in this section, please refer to the Section

[Font Library].

• [Frame/Edge] Tab: Click [Select] button to specify the style of frame/edge as Figure 83.


2. Instructions

Figure 83. The [Static Text] Dialog Box


2. Instructions

Figure 84. The [Frame/Edge] Tab

The functions of [True Type Text] and [Static Text] are similar only applicable on SoftPanel.

2.6.2.3. [Bitmap]

The purpose of [Bitmap] is to provide graphes for selection as the figure below.Double-click on the object; a user can select the bitmap form the drop-down list in the [Static Graphic] dialog box.

Figure 85. The [Static Graphic] Dialog Box

2.6.3.

[Frame/Edge] ,[Scale] and [Table]

2.6.3.1. [Frame/Edge]

[Frame/Edge] provides style, pattern style, background and color for

selection. See Figure 86.

Note that there is flow chart style for selection; See Figure 86.


2. Instructions

Figure 86. The [Frame/Edge] Dialog Box

Figure 87. Select Frame Style


2. Instructions

2.6.3.2. [Scale]

[Scale] provides left, right, up, down direction, color, number of ticks and display marks as below.

2 minor ticks

5 major ti

Figure 88. The [Scale] Dialog Box


2.6.3.3. [Table]

The function of [Table] is to create a table as below.

2. Instructions

Figure 89. The [Table] Dialog Box

• [Use First Row as Row Header]：Specify the pattern style and color of row header.

• [Use First Column as Column Header]：Specify the pattern style and color of column header.

• [Border]：Specify the style and color of border.

• [Profile]：Specify the location and size of a table.

• [Cells General]：Specify number of rows/columns, and style.


2. Instructions

• [Transparent]：Display other object(s) in the table but remembert to place the table up.

Example：Static Text below.

and Table as

Place static text object on the table and check

[transparent] box.

• [Interlacing]：Interlace rows or columns; See below. (Only applicable on distransparent table)

Figure 90. [Interlacing]

• [Apply to Header]：Interlace applied to header; See below.

(Only applicable on distransparent table)

Figure 91. [Apply to Header]


2. Instructions

2.6.4. [Shape]

[Shape] provides graphes for selection; Double-click on the object, a user can press [select] for the shape library in the [Shape] dialog box as below.

Figure 92. The [Shape] Dialog Box

2.6.5.

Flow Chart

Flow chart is one of the applications in [Draw] to lines, geometric graphes and frame/edge editing. A user can illustrate an applied folw chart clearly to facilitate the operation.

Example:

Convert the boiler temperature in procedure A into centigrade (

°C).

Once the temperature > 100

°C, it will enter procedure B; once the temperature

≤ 100°C will enter procedure C. The following flow chart is made up of polygon, rectangle, lines with arrows and static text:


2. Instructions


2. Instructions

I. Introduction

A screen object is an item placed on the screen to perform a particular function. Each object has its unique user configurable properties and the object allows to be set to perform exactly the method desired.

Objects are divided into four categories: (1) related to screen button and dynamic data; (2) irrelative to screen button but related to dynamic data; (3) related to PLC dynamic data and Workstation memory buffer

zone; and (4) related to application. See Figure 93.

Related to screen button and dynamic data

Irrelative to screen button but related to dynamic data

Related to PLC dynamic data and workstation memory buffer zone.

Related to application

Figure 93. The [Object] Commands List

Four Categories of objects:

1. Related to screen button and dynamic data: [Push Button],[Numeric Entry],[Character Entry]....etc.

There are 13 sub-commands in [Push Button] list; See Figure 94.


2. Instructions

Sub-commands i

[Push Button] Li

Figure 94. The sub-commands in [Push Button] list

2. Irrelative to screen button but related to dynamic data :

[Indicator],[Numeric Display],[Character Display],[Message Display],[Bar Graph],[Trend Graph],[X-Y

Chart],[Panel Meter],[Pie Graph],and [Dynamic Graphic].

3. Related to PLC dynamic data and Workstation memory buffer zone: [Historical Display] and [Alarm Display].

4. Related to application: Data contents are connected with whole system. One of the contents is modified such as text display or PLC data format, the other objects with the same application will be changed simultaneously as [Submacro].

II. Create Object

A user can select object type from the [Object] menu to edit. There are

some objects with sub-commands list as Figure 94. Futhermore, [Basic

Objects] toolbar provides part of objects for the editing as well; See

Figure 95.

86 ADP 6.0 User’s Manual ADP

2. Instructions

Figure 95. The [Basic Objects] Toolbar

Select a desired object from the list (ex: [Push Button]/[Set Button]), it will give you a cursor (+) that allows you to drag an object to desired

size by press left mouse button until left-click. See Figure 96.

Figure 96. An Illustration of a Object

Once created, the object can be resized by clicking on one of the objects handlebars and dragging to resize it. To move the object, click and drag from the center of the object. (If the object handlebars are not visible, clicking anywhere on the object will bring up the handlebars).

III. Specify Object Properties

There are three ways to specify the properties of an object: (1) Users can select [Object Attributes] from the [Edit] menu. (2) Alternatively, double left-click on the object, or (3) right-click on the object and then select [Object Attributes] from the pop-up menu. Above ways will bring up the dialog box for properties specified. The [Set/Reset Button]

dialog box as in Figure 97 will be appeared on the screen.


2. Instructions

In ADP software, each object has its corresponding dialog box. For example, there is the [On/Off Button] dialog box in [Set Button] object; there is the [Numeric Entry] dialog box in [Numeric Entry] object.

The following will explain the common properties of most objects; concerning some specific properties will be explained later. The following are five tabs in object properties.

1. [Attributes] Tab: To specify the major properties. Each object has its attributes that define the operation; See

Figure 97.

Figure 97. The [On/Off Button] Dialog Box

• [Shape] Block:

♦ [Select]: Specify shape from library.

♦ [Color]: Specify the color of selected shape.

• [Variable]

Block:

♦ [Write]: Write to the specified PLC register.

♦ [Read]: Read the value from the specified PLC register. If the location is not specified, then the HMI reads from the [Write] location.


2. Instructions

♦ [Enabled By]: Specify the PLC register to ON button. This

isinapplicable on OFF state labeled ; See Figure 98. This is only applicable on ON state; See Figure 99. (This feature is

only applicable on objects with input text/numeric or specific

state.)

Specified State =OFF

Figure 98. Specified State =OFF, inapplicable object with label

Specified State =ON

Figure 99. Specified State =ON

2. [Shape] Tab: Specify the shape style of a selected object as Figure 100.


2. Instructions

Figure 100. The [Shape] Tab

• [Shape] Block:

♦ [Select]: Select shape from library.

♦ [Color]: Specify the color of the shape.

• [Profile] Block: Specify the location, width and height of the object.

• [State] Block: Specify the object design to corresponding state.

♦ [Pattern Style]: Specify the pattern style for the object.

♦ [Pattern Color]: Specify the color of the pattern for the object.

♦ [Bkg. Color]: Specify the background color of the object.

♦ [Blink]: Check the object with blink or not.

3. [State] Tab: Specify [New]/[Copy]/[Delete] state to the object as Figure 101.


2. Instructions

Figure 101. The [State] Tab

• [New]: Add new state to the object.

• [Cut]: Cut the specified state in the clipboard.

• [Copy]: Copy the specified state of the object and keep the original state.

• [Paste]: Paste the state from the clipboard.

• [Replace]: Replace the current specified state from the clipboard.

• [Delete]: Delete the current specified state.

4. [Text] Tab: Specify [Font],[Underlined],[Color],[Bkg.

Color] and [Blink] as Figure 102.


2. Instructions

Figure 102. The [Text] Tab

• [Editing Option]:

♦ [Wrap Lines]: When the length of the text is longer than the width of the button, it will be wrapped lines.

♦ [Text Movable]: When the length of the text is longer than the width of the button, it won’t be wrapped lines. Click the text object on the selected object, the text will be surrounded with the handlebars for drag.

• [Font]: Specify the size of the font.(be greater than “16X16”)

• [Underlined]: Check the text with underlined.

• [Color]: Specify the color of the text.

• [Bkg. Color]: Specify the background color of the text.

• [Blink]: Check the text with blink.

•

: Align the text “Left/Center/Right”

5. [Graphic] Tab: Specify bitmap style, color…etc for each state as Figure 103.


2. Instructions

Figure 103. The [Graphic] Tab

• [Bitmap]: Specify the bitmap to display.

• [Transparent]: Check the bitmap with transparent.

• [Transparent Color]: Specify the color of the bitmap with transparent.

• [Black Part Color]: Replace the black part color.(only applicable on monochrome)

• [White Part Color]: Replace the white part color.(only applicable on monochrome)

• [Arrangement]: Arrange the moveable bitmap to previous location.

• [Keep Original Size]: Keep the bitmap original size.

The following sections will talk each basic object.


2. Instructions

2.7.1. [Basic Objects]

There are 13 buttons in sub-command list on the [Push Button]. The following are these objects’ table:

Basic objects Icon Function

Set Button

Reset Button

Maintained Button

Momentary Button

Press to set the contact as ON,release or re-click still be ON.

Press to set the contact as OFF,release or re-click still be OFF.

Press to set the contact as ON, release still be on; reclick be OFF.

Press to set the contact as ON; release be OFF.

Multistate Button

Set Value Button

Set Constant Button

Press to change a register to the next (previous) state of a referenced register. S0ÖS1ÖS2ÖS3ÖS4ÖS0 (a straightforward cycle) or S0ÖS4ÖS3ÖS2ÖS1ÖS0 (a reverse cycle).

Press to a numeric keypad display. Press ENTER button to write a numeric entry to corresponding PLC register.

Press to write a constant to a register.

Increament/Decreament Button

Goto Screen Button

Previous Screen

Button

Action Button

Data to Text

Conversion Button

/

Press to write the value obtained by adding/substracting a constant to/from the corresponding register value corresponding PLC register.

Press to change the current screen to the specified screen.

Press to change the current screen to the previous screen.

Please refer to

Section 2.7.1.12. [Action Button]

.

Convert logging buffer,recipe, alarm history and alarm frequency to *.PRN file readed by EXCEL, WORD,

WORDPAD and so on.

I. Function

When pressed, Workstaion sets the PLC corresponding bit location to be ON. A [Set] button will still be ON whenevr pressed or released


II. Properties

2. Instructions

• [Function] Block： Select [Set] to create a [Set Button]

• [Security] Block：

♦ [Minimum Hold Time (Sec.)]: Specify how long to activate the button’s function; There are 0~10 (Sec.) for selection.

♦ [Operator Comfirmation]: If any changes have been made, the dialog box will appear on the screen to ask a user to confirm the desired operation. There are 5~60 (Sec.) waiting time for selection.

• [Macro] Block：Check the [Use ON Macro] for a [Set Button].

When pressed [Edit] button, the [ON Macro] dialog box will appear as in Figure 104 on the screen. For the properties which

are not explained in this section, please refer to the

Chapter 8

Macro .

♦ [Use ON Macro]: When pressed the [Set Button], Workstation will run the program which is designed in ON macro. This feature is to data control, screen display, PLC register, bits initialized and so on.


2. Instructions

Figure 104. The [ON Macro] Edit Window

• [External Key]：To set the external key and definite the key function F1~F9, this feature is only applicable on PWS500.

For the properties which are not explained in this section, please refer

to the Section 2.7. Object III Specify Object Properties

.

III. Example

To design a [Set] button as shown in the following：

1. Shape：Select “Raised”.

2. [Write]：Specify the PLC register “Y0” to write in.

[Read] ：Specify “Y0”. (The HMI model is PWS3261 and the PLC model is Mitsubishi FX2N.)

To design a [On/Off ] button on the [Attributes] tab as shown below:


2. Instructions

3. Enter text “OFF” in state 0 (OFF); the font is “16x16”, the color is “White” and the bkg. color is “Black”.

4. Enter text “ON” in state 1 (ON); the font is “24x24”, the color is “Black” and the bkg. color is “White”.

To design a [On/Off] button on the [Attributes] tab as shown below:


2. Instructions

Above-mentioned steps will create a [ON] button. The bkg. color is

“White” and the text is “ON” in state 1; the bkg. color is “Black”and

the text is “OFF” in state 0. See Figure 105.

Figure 105. Left-side button displays [ON] in state 1; Right-side displays [OFF] in state 0


2. Instructions

I. Function

The command is contrary to an [ON] button. A [Reset] button sets a bit-location to OFF whenever pressed or released.

II. Properties

• [Function] Block：Select [Reset] to create a [OFF] button.

All other properties are the same as [Set Button], please refer to 2.7.1.1.

[Set Button] .

III. Example

To design two state displays as a [ON] button simultaneously; please

refer to the Section 2.7.1.1. [Set Button] .


2. Instructions

I. Function

This function is to changes the button states by press. Press to be ON and release still be ON until re-click to be OFF.

II. Properties

• [Function] Block：Select [Maintained] to create a [Maintained] button.

• [Macro] Block：There are [User ON Macro] and [User OFF

Macro] options for [Maintained Button]. For the properties which are not explained in this section, please refer to the

Chapter 8 Macro .

Other properties are the same as [Set Button], please refer to the

2.7.1.1. [Set Button] .

III. Example

To design two states as a [ON] button; please refer to 2.7.1.1. [Set

Button] .


2. Instructions

2.7.1.4. [Momentary Button]

I. Function

The function of this command is to changes the state by press and release. Once the button is pressed, the bit-location is ON; Release to be OFF.

II. Properties

• [Function] Block：Select [Momentary] to create a [Momentary] button.

• [Macro] Block：There are [Use ON Macro] and [Use OFF macro] options for [Momentary Button]. For the properties which are not explained in this section, please refer to the

Chapter 8 Macro .

To design two states as a [ON] button simultaneously; please refer to

2.7.1.1. [Set Button]

.


2. Instructions

Notice that this command does not provide [Use ON

Macro] and [Use OFF Macro].

I

II. Example

To design two states as a [ON] button simultaneously; please refer to

2.7.1.1. [Set Button] .

I. Function

Once the button is pressed, Workstation will write the command to a correspondent PLC bit-location or register. The option [Change to

Next State] is to change states in straightforward cycle

(S0ÖS1ÖS2ÖS3ÖS4ÖS0); the option [Change to Previous State] is to changes states in reverse cycle (S0ÖS4ÖS3ÖS2ÖS1ÖS0).

II. Properties

• [Variable] Block：


2. Instructions

♦ [Write]: Write the specified command to a correspondent PLC bit-location and register.

- [Bit]: Only two states. (Enable a user to enter multi-stated text but only two states can be displayed on Workstation)

- [Value]: 256 (0-255) states in all, 0 represents state 0; 1 represents state 1…etc.

- [LSB]: 16 states in all represented by bit. The Workstation takes the bit number of the least bit that is on as the state number.

♦ [Format]: Only applicable on [Value] option. There are [BCD],

[Signed Binary], and [Unsigned Binary] options.　　　　

♦ [Read]: Specify a register/bit location to read in; if the location is not specified, then the HMI reads from the [Write] location.

• [Function] Block：

♦ [Change to Next State]: Change the [Write] location to its next state in straightforward cycle S0ÖS1ÖS2ÖS3ÖS4ÖS0.

♦ [Change to Previous State]: Change the [Write] location to its previous state in reverse cycle S0ÖS4ÖS3ÖS2ÖS1ÖS0.

Note that the number of states can be edited in [State] tab.

For other properties which are not explained in this section, please

refer to the Section 2.7. III Object Specify Object properties

.

III. Example

To design a [Multistate] button as the following:

1. [Write] ： Specify the PLC register “D50” to write in.

[Read] ： Specify as “D50”. (The HMI model is

PWS3261 and the PLC model is Mitsubishi FX2N.)

2. The format is [Value].

3. The [Function] is [Change to Previous State].

4. Shape：Select “Outlined _1” and the color is black.


2. Instructions

5. Add 8 states in [State] tab.


2. Instructions

6. Enter the correspondent words on the [Text] tab and specify the text display.

Aboved-mentioned steps will create a [Multistate Button]. The button displays “First State” in state 1; the button displays “Second State” in

state 1...etc. See Figure 106.

Figure 106. The 8 states in [Multistate Button]


2. Instructions

2.7.1.6. [Set Value Button]

I. Function

The function of this command is for numeric entry. When pressed, theWorkstation displays a numeric keypad on the screen. When pressed [ENT], the Workstation will store the input value to the correspondant PLC register.

Note that the correpondant PLC value is not applicable on [Set

ValueButton].

II. Properties

• [Variable] Block:

♦ [Word]：The entered value is a 16-bit data; the maximum

65,535.

♦ [Double Word]：The entered value is a 32-bit data; the maximum is 4,294,967,295.

♦ [Format]：There are “BCD”, “Signed Binary”, “Unsigned Binary” and “Hexadecimal” options.

♦ [Notification]：Specify a register/bit location to be notified;


2. Instructions

the HMI will set the bit to be ON.

- [Before Writing]: The HMI sets the Notification to be ON when the numeric keypad appears and sets the location to be OFF when the numeric keypad disappear.

- [After Writing]: The Worksation sets the [Notification] location to be ON after writing the input value to the

[Write] location.

• [Display Format] Block:

♦ [Decimal Pt. Position] ：Specify the number of digits after the integral part of the number.(The maximum is based on the specified format)

♦ [Intergral Digts]：The number of the integral part in a number.

♦ [Fractional Digts]：The number of decimal digits.

♦ [Display Asterisk Instead of Number]：Display asterisk instead of input value for security.

• [Validation and Security] Block:

♦ [Input Min]：Set the minimum input value. (Less than the minimum input value will be warned and rejected.)

♦ [Input Max]：Set the maximum input value. (Greater than the maximum will be warned and rejected.)

♦ [User Level]：There are 9 levels, the order is 1 > 2 … > 8 > 9.

♦ [Operation Comfirmation]：When enter the value, the dialog box should appear on the screen to ask for the User’s comfirmation; the longest waiting time is 5~60 (Sec.).


refer to the Section 2.7. III Object Specify Object Properties

.

III. Example

To design a [Set Value] button as the following:

1. Shape：Select “Raised Base”。

2. [Write]：Specify the PLC register “D100” to write in.

[Notification] ：Specify “M10”. (The HMI model is


3. The Numeric Entry is [Word].

4. Specify the [Notification] location to be ON after writing the input value to the [Write] location.


2. Instructions

5. The numeric display is [Display Asterisks Instead of

Number] on the numeric keyapad.

6. The input min. is ‘0’, the input max. is ‘2000’.

7. After numeric entry, it’s needed operator comfirmation.

8. Enter the desired text on the [Text] tab and the bkg. color is white.


2. Instructions

Above-mentioned steps will create a [Set Value] Button. When pressed this button, the numeric keypad will display on the screen. After numeric entry, the input value can not display on a [Set Value] button directly. Therefore, a user can design the other object [Numeric

Display] to display the input value; See Figure 107.

Figure 107. The [Set Value] Button and [Numeric Display] object


2. Instructions

2.7.1.7. [Set Constant Button]

I. Function

When pressed this button, the Workstation will write a constant to thecorrepondant PLC register. The numeric keypad will not display on the screen due to the constant have been set in PLC.

II. Properties

• [Value]：Specify the constant value here.


refer to the Section 2.7.1.6. [Set Value Button] and the

Section 2.7.

Object III Specify Object Properties .

III. Example

Here takes the glass list as example. When press one of these buttons, the Workstation will write the specified constant value to the correpondant PLC register. In this example, “4mm glasses” represents the contant value “400”, “5mm glasses” represents the constant value

“500”…etc. See Figure 108.


2. Instructions

Figure 108. The Example of [Set Constant] Buttons- glass list

The properties of [Set Constant] buttons above (ex. “4 mm Glass”):

1. [Write] ： Specify the PLC register “D10”. [Notification] ： Specify “M10”. (The HMI model is PWS3261 and the PLC model is Mitsubishi FX2N.)

2. The numeric entry is [Word].

3. Specify the constant value “400” to a “4 mm Glass” button.

[Set Constant]

Button


2. Instructions

4. Enter the desired text on the [Text] tab and the bkg. color is green.


2. Instructions

Above-mentioned steps will create a “4mm glasses” button. When pressed, the Workstation will store the constant value “400” to the register “D10”.

Following the same steps to design other glass buttons but the constant value should be reset.

I. Function

When pressed, the Workstation reads the constant variable stored in the PLC register. Then the value obtained by adding the specified constant will be written in the correspondent PLC register.

II. Properties


2. Instructions

• [Function] Block:

♦ [Increment]：Select [Increment] to create an [Increment] button; one press increases a specified constant.

♦ [Jog Step]：The [Increment] button is to add the specified constant by a press.

♦ [Limit]：Specify the maximum written in a register if the button is an Increment Button.

For other properties which are not explained in this section, please refer to the

Section 2.7.1.6. [Set Value Button] and

the Section 2.7.


III. Example

Figure 109 is an illustration of an [Increment] button. Once pressed the

[Increment] key, the incresead value stored in the PLC register will be displayed in bar graph. ([Bar Graph] is an object used to display the dynamic data in ADP)


2. Instructions

Figure 109. An Illustration of an [Increment] Button

The properties of an [Increament] button above:

5. [Write]：Specify the PLC register “D200” to write in.

[Notification] ：Specify as “D200”. (The HMI model is


6. Shape：Select “Outlined_1”。

7. The jog step is ‘5’, the limit is ‘100’.


2. Instructions

8. Enter the desired text on the [Text] tab and the bkg. color is “White”.

The following is an illustration of an [Increment] button.

Press [Increment] button five times.

Figure 110. Press butoon five times to add ‘25’ to the PLC constant

2.7.1.9. [Decrement]

I. Function


2. Instructions

When pressed, the Workstation reads the constant variable stored in the PLC register. Then the value obtained by subtracting the specified constant will be written in the correspondent PLC register.

II. Properties


♦ [Decrement]：Select [Decrement] to crate a [Decrement] button. One press is to one subtraction.

♦ [Jog Step]：Secify the constant of jog step to subtract for a

[Decreased] Button.

♦ [Limit]：Specify the minimine limit to a register for a [Decreased] button.

For more properties wich are not explained in this Section, please to the

Section 2.7. Object III Specify Object Properties

.

III. Example

Figure 111 is an illustration of a [Decrement] button. When pressed the

[Decrement] button, the subtracted constant value stored in a PLC


2. Instructions

register will be displayed in a bar graph. ([Bar Graph] is an object used to display the dynamic data in ADP)

Figure 111. An illustration of the [Increment]/[Decrement] button

The steps to design a [Decrement] button are the same as Section

2.7.1.8. [Decrement Button] III. Example

, remember to change the limit to ‘0’.

The following is an illustration for the [Decrement Button].


2. Instructions

Press [Decrement] button five times

Figure 112. Press [Decrement] button five times to subtract ‘25’ to the PLC constant

2.7.1.10. [Goto Screen Button]

I. Function

When pressed, the Workstaion will change the current screen to the specified screen.

II. Properties


2. Instructions


♦ [Open/Go To]：Check this option to create a [Open/Go To] button. A user can specify the screen to change from the dropdown list.

♦ [Enabled By]：Only change the screen when the PLC register is ON.

• [Execution] Block:

♦ [On Press]：Execute the command when pressed.

♦ [On Release]：Execute the command when released.

• [Appended Functions] Block:

♦ [Change to the Lowest User Level]：Set the current user level as the lowest level (User Level 9).

♦ [Keep the Button’s Screen Open]：Keep the button’s screen up on the screen.(only applicable on sub-screen in xx60 series)

♦ [Acknowledge Alarm]：Acknowledges the curren active alarm when pressed.

♦ [Notify]：Specify a bit-location to notify after press.

• [Security] Block:

♦ [User Level]：9 levels in all, the levels are 1 > 2 … > 8 > 9.

For other properties which are not explained in this Section, please

refer to the Section 2.7. Object III Specify Object Properties

.

III. Example

To design a [Goto Screen] button as the following：

1. Shape：Select “Raised”.

2. Press this button to change to “Screen_3”.

3. The command is excuted when pressed.


2. Instructions

4. Enter the desired text on the [Text] tab.


2. Instructions

Figure 113 is an illustration of the [Goto Screen] button.

[Goto Screen] Button

Figure 113. An illustration of a [Goto Screen] Button

I. Function

When pressed this button, the Workstation will change the current to previous screen.

II. Properties


2. Instructions


♦ [Close/Previous] ： Select [Close/Previous] to create a

[Close/Previous] button.


refer to the Section 2.7.1.10. [Goto Screen Buttons]

and Section 2.7.


III. Example

The steps to design a [Close/Previous] button are the same as the

Section 2.7.1.10. [Goto Screen Button] III. Example .Remember to

check the [Close/Previous] option.

Figure 114 is an illustration of a [Close/Previous] button.


2. Instructions

[Previous Screen] Button

Figure 114. An Example of the [Previous Screen] Button

I. Function

An Action button performs a built-in function.


2. Instructions

II. Properties

1. To use the action buttons below in PWS models:

• [Action] Block:

♦ “Contrast Up”: Increase the contrast or brightness of the display.

♦ “Contrast Down”: Decrease the contrast or brightness of the display.

♦ “Save contrast”: Save the setting of contrast or brightness.

♦ “Password Table”: Display the password table.

♦ “Reenter Passward”: Display the password table to reenter.

♦ “Set Lowest User Level”: Change to the lowest user level = 9.

♦ “Print Screen”: Print the specified region (HARDCOPY) of current screen.

♦ “Goto System Menu”: Change to the system menu.

♦ “Turn off Backlight”: Turn off the backlight.

♦ “Alarm Ack”: Acknowledge the current active alarm to keep going on.

♦ “Set Time & Date”: Set the time and date.

♦ Select Language #1~#5: Display the screen by the specified language, 5 languages for selection.


2. Instructions

These features are not applicable on all HMI models; please refer to the Appendix A. - Table of the ADP 6.0 Features and

HMI Models .

2. To use the action buttons below in SoftPanel:

• [Action] Block:

♦ “Password Table”: Display the password table on SoftPanel.

♦ “Reenter Password”: Display the password table to reenter on

SoftPanel.

♦ “Set Lowest User Level”: Change to the lowest user level = 9 on SoftPanel.

♦ “Print Screen”: Print the specified region (HARDCOPY) of current screen on SoftPanel.

♦ “Goto System Menu”: Change to the system menu on Soft-

Panel.

♦ “Alarm Ack”: Acknowledge the current active alarm to keep going on SoftPanel.

♦ “Select Screen”: Select the screen to change from the dialg box when pressed on SoftPanel.

♦ “Name Recipe”: Name the recipe which data and number have been specified from the dialog box when pressed on SoftPanel,

Chinese/English is allowable.


2. Instructions

♦ “Select Recipe”: Enter the recipe which data and number have been specified from the dialog box for search when pressed on

SoftPanel. This object is used to great number of recipes; Chinese/English is allowable.

♦ “Print Report”: Print the edited report which report format is recipe, logging buffer and alarm…etc on SoftPanel.

♦ “Run Application”: Run the application based on the specified route when pressed on SoftPanel.

♦ Select Language #1~#5: Display the screen by the specified language, 5 languages for selection.

These features are not applicable on all HMI models; please refer to the Appendix A. - Table of the ADP 6.0 Features and

HMI Models .



.

III. Example

Figure 115 is an illustration of [Action] buttons. When press the button,

the contrast of the display will be changed.

Action Button

Figure 115. An Illustration of [Action] buttons

To design a [Action] Button as below：

1.

The [Action] is “Contrast Up”. See Figure 116.


2. Instructions

2. The Bitmap is “PwsSymbol – ContrastUp”.See Figure

117.

Figure 116. Select [Contrast Up] in [Action]


2. Instructions

Figure 117. Select bitmap to an [Action] Button

2.7.1.13. [Data Text Conversion Button]

I. Function

This Fteature is only applicable on SoftPanel. This command is to convert the data such as logging buffer, recipes, alarm history buffer,alarm frequency buffer to the text file saved as *.PRN file. Then, it can be readed in text software (ex. Excel, Word, Notpad, and so on.)

II. Properties


2. Instructions

Figure 118. The [Data to Text Conversion Button] Dialog Box

• [Data Source] Block： Convert [Logging Buffrt], [Recipes],

[Alarm History Buffer] and [Alarm Frequency Buffer] to text file.

• [Text Format] Block：

♦ [Number of Data Item]：Sepcify the number of items to be converted to text file; the maxmum is 32 items.

♦ [Default Data Format]：[BCD], [Signed BIN] and [Unsigned

BIN].

♦ Text Format Table：Click one of cells to select the format from the drop-down list.



.


2. Instructions

III. Example

一. Button Design

Figure 119. An Illustration of the [Data to Text Conversion Button]

To design [Data to Text Conversion Button] buttons as Figure 109; See

below：

1. Shape：Select “Raised Base”.

2. [Data Source] is [Logging Buffer].

3. [Number of Data Items] is 4; [Default Data Format] is

“BCD”.


2. Instructions

4. Enter the desired text on the [Text] tab; the text color is

‘White’and the bkg. color is ‘Gray’.


2. Instructions

The steps to design the other [Data to Text Conversion Button] are thesame (ex. [Recipes], [Alarm History Buffer] and [Alarm Frequency

Buffer]) but remember to change the option in [Data Souce].

二. Steps

1. Execute the *.SP2 file which is designed in ADP on Soft-

Panel.

2. Select the correspondent [Data to Text Conversion] button (ex. [Logging Buffer],[Recipes]…etc) to specified data. Then, the dialog box will ask for enter the file name (*.PRN) to save. See Figure 120.


2. Instructions

Figure 120. Execute the [Data to Text Conversion] Button

3. Open the converted file in the text software (ex. Word,

Excel…etc) to read. See Figure 121.


2. Instructions

Figure 121. Open the coverted file (*.PRN) in Excel


2. Instructions

2.7.2. [Numeric Entry]

I. Function

Once the button is pressed, a numeric keypad will be displayed on the screen. Enter a value and then press the [ENT] on the keypad. The

HMI will then write the input value to the specified PLC register. The functions of this button are to provide users with a numeric input and its display.

II. Properties


♦ [Format]：There are “BCD”, “Signed Binary”, “Unsigned Binary”, “Hexadecimal”, “32-bit Floating-point” and “Octal”.

♦ [Notification]：Specify a register/bit location to be notified; the HMI will set the bit to be ON.

- [Before Writing]: The HMI sets the Notification location to be ON when the numeric keypad appears and sets the location to be OFF when the numeric pad disappears.


2. Instructions

- [After Writing]: The Workstation sets the [Notification] location to be ON after writing the input value to the

[Write] location.

• [Display Format] Block：

♦ [Fill Leading Zero]：Select this option to fill leading zeros; for example, “5902.1”is displayed as “005902.1”.

♦ [Decimal Pt. Position] ：Specify the number of digits after the integral part of the number. There are 0~10 digits for choice.

♦ [Fractional Digts]：The number of decimal digits.

(Fractional Digts + Integral Digts or Decimal Pt. Position <= the maximum number of digits.)

♦ [Integral Digts]：The number of the integral part in a number.

(Fractional Digts + Integral Digts or Decimal Pt. Position <= the maximum number of digits.)

♦ [Scaling]：The formula is Y = aX+b (Note that this only the formats “Signed Binary”, “Unsigned Binary” and “32-bit Floating-point” support this option.)

- [Gain]：Y = aX，where X = the value stored in PLC and Y=

HMI displayed value.

- [Offset]：If the ininitial value is not zero, then set the [Offset].

• [Validation and Security] Checking box：

♦ [Variable Input Limits]：Set the input limits as variable. The minimum is stored in the bit following the [Write] location; the maximum is stored in the bit following the minimun input value. For example, if the [Write] location is “D10”, then the minimum is stored in “D11”; the maximum is stored in “D12”.

♦ [Min]：Set the minimum input value. (Less than the minimun input value will be warned and rejected.)

♦ [Max]：Set the maximum input value. (Greater than the maximum will be warned and rejected.)

Address X X+1 X+2

Write Min Max

Example: D10 D11 D12

For the properties which are not explained in this section, please refer to the Section 2.7.1.6. [Set Constant Value] and the Section 2.7. Object III Specify Object properties .

ADP 6.0 User’s Manual ADP 133

2. Instructions

III. Example

一

. A Basic Numeric Entry Button

The following are the steps to create a [Numeric Entry] button：

1. Frame Style: Select “DE_Module_2”; and the background color is “Black”; the character color is “White”.

2. [Write]：Specify the PLC register “D100” to store the value.

(The HMI model is PWS3261 and the PLC model is Mitsubishi

FX2N.)

3. [Format] is “Unsigned Binary”.

4. Allow 4 integral digits in a number.

5. The minimum of an input value is “0” and the maximum of an input value is “60000.”


2. Instructions

The steps above will create a [Numeric Entry] button. Once the button is pressed, a numeric keypad will be displayed on the screen. After entering a value, the HMI will show the input value on the button.

Users can also design a [Numeric Display] object to display the value stored in the PLC. Therefore, for this basic numeric entry button, if one enters “10” on the HMI, then both of the [Numeric Entry] button and

the [Numeric Display] object will show “10.” See Figure 122.


2. Instructions

[Numeric]

Entry

Figure 122. A basic [Numeric Entry] button and a [Numeric Display] object

二

. A Numeric Entry Button with the Scaling Feature

To design a [Numeric Entry] button with the [Scaling] feature, [Gain]

= 0.5; [Offset] = 2:

All other properties are the same as the example above.


2. Instructions

This example will create a [Numeric Entry] button with the [Scaling] feature. After entering a value, the HMI will show the input value on the button. Users can also design a [Numeric Display] button to display the value stored in the PLC. Therefore, for this example of the button with the [Scaling] feature, if one enters “10” on the HMI, then the [Numeric Entry] button will show “10” and the [Numeric Display] object

will show “16.” See Figure 123.

(Y = aX + b: X is the value stored in the PLC, Y is the input value on an HMI; where a=0.5 and b=2 here)


2. Instructions

[Numeric]

Entry

Figure 123.

[Numeric Display] button

A [Numeric Entry] button with [Scaling] feature and a

2.7.3.

[Character Entry]

I. Function

Once the button is pressed, an alphabetic keypad will be displayed on the screen. Enter character(s) and then press the [ENT] on the keypad.

The HMI will then write the input entry in ASCII to the specified PLC register. The functions of this button are to provide users with an alphabetic input and its display.

The object is not applicable on all HMI models; please refer to


II. Properties


2. Instructions


♦ [Number of Characters]：The number of characters; the maximum is “28.” (2 words in ASCII = 1 Word in a PLC register)

For the properties which are not explained in this section, please refer to the Section 2.7.1.6. [Set Value Button] and the Section 2.7. Object

III Specify Object Properties .

III. Example

The following are the steps to create a [Character Entry] button：


2. Instructions

1. [Write]：Specify the PLC register “D210” to store the input value. (The HMI model is PWS3261 and the PLC model is

Mitsubishi FX2N)

2. The [Number of Characters] is “4”.

3. The [Waiting Time (Sec.)] is “20” seconds.

The steps above will create a [Character Entry] button. Once the button is pressed, an alphabetic keypad will be displayed on the screen. After entering the characters, press the [ENT] on the keypad. Then a dialog


2. Instructions

box should appear on the screen to ask for the user’s confirmation. See

Figure 124.

Note that press the [ALT] key for the keypad shift.

Figure 124. The [Character Entry] button

2.7.4.

[List]

I. Function

Each item in the [List] object is correspondant to desinated register value in PLC. The first item represents the register value as “0”. The second item represents the register value as “1”, and so on. When user chooses one of the items in the list, the Workstation will store the correspondant value in PLC register.

The corresponding item will be highlighted in a [List] object. Furthermore, a user can change the value of a PLC register by making a selection from a [List] object. This object is not applicable on all HMI models; please refer to the Section Appendix A. – Table of the ADP

6.0 Features and the HMI Models.

II. Properties


2. Instructions


♦ [Read Only]: For the purpose of display. Users are not able to make a selection from the list.

♦ [Write]: Writes the value to the specified PLC register.

♦ [Type of State]:

- [Value]: There are 256 states (0-255). The value of “0” represents state 0; the value of “1” represents state 1, and so on.

- [LSB]: There are 16 states. If more than 2 bits are to be ON, the PLC register will store the value of the lower bit.

♦ [Format]: This is only applicable when [Value] option is selected. There are three selections “BCD”, “Signed Binary”, and

“Unsigned Binary”.　　　　　

♦ [Read]: Reads the value from the specified PLC register. If the location is not specified, then the HMI reads from the [Write] location.

For the properties which are not explained in this section, please refer to the Section

2.7. Object III Specify Object Proerties .

III. Example


The following are the steps to create a [List] object：

2. Instructions

1. Shape：Select “Outlined_2”; and the background color is

“White”.

2. [Write]：Specify the PLC register “D10” to store the value.(The HMI model is PWS3261 and the PLC model is Mitsubishi FX2N)

3. The [Type of State] is “Value”.

4. The [Format] is “BCD”.


2. Instructions

5. On the [State] tab, add new states. There are 8 states in this object.

6. On the [Text] tab, enter the text and set up the format of the display.

The steps above will create a [List] object. When a user selects an item from the [List] object, the HMI will write the value associated with the item to the specified PLC register. Therefore, if the item “Peach” is selected, then the value of the PLC register will be “5.”


[List]

2. Instructions

Figure 125. The [List] object and the display of the PLC register value of the item

2.7.5.

[Drop Down List]

I. Function

Each of the items in a [Drop Down List] object also corresponds to a value of a PLC register. Therefore, for a [Drop Down List] object, the value associated with the displayed item is the current value of the

PLC register.

Click the object to display the list. The object will then drop down a list of items which a user can choose from. Furthermore, a user can change the value of a PLC register by making a selection from a [Drop

Down List] object. Once a selection is made from the object, the list will be disappeared. This object is not applicable on all HMI models, please refer to Appendix A.- Table of the ADP 6.0 Feature and the HMI models for the complete details.

II. Properties

The properties of the [Drop Down List] object are similar to those for

the [List] object, please refer to the Section 2.7.4. [List]

and the Section 2.7. Object III Specify Object Properties .

III. Example

The steps to create a [Drop Down List] object are similar to those for a

[List] object. Please refer to the Section 2.7.4. [List] III. Example

for


2. Instructions

the complete details. Remember to adjust the length of a list accordingly so that a user is able to display all items of the list.

Figure 126 is an example of a [Drop Down List] object on the HMI.

Click the object to display the list. The object will then drop down a list of items which a user can choose from. When a user selects an item from the list, the HMI will write the value associated with the item to the PLC register. Therefore, if the item “Peach” is selected, then the value of the PLC register will be “5.”

Notice that once a selection is made from the object, the list will be disappeared.

[Drop Down List]

Figure 126. The [Drop Down List] object and the display of the register value of the item


2. Instructions

2.7.6. [Indicator]

I. Function

[Multistate Indicator] is to indicate which state it is with text and /or a graphic. Therefore, as the HMI reads the contact status or the register value from the PLC, it can automatically display the corresponding designed content on the HMI screen according to the indicator.

The following are the number of the states:

1. [Bit]: The maximum number of the states is “2”;

2. [Value]:

T he maximum number of the states is “256”;

3. [LSB]: The maximum number of the states is “16”.

II. Properties


♦ [Read]: Specify the register/bit location.

- [Bit]: Two states in all. (User can input more than two states but the object only displays two states on HMI.)


2. Instructions

- [Value]: 256 states (0-255) in all ; value 0 represents state 0; value 1 represents state 1; value 2 represents state 2, and so on.

- [LSB]: 16 states in all ; the Workstation takes the bit number of the least bit that is on as the state number.

♦ [Format]: Specify the data format. There are three options:

[BCD], [Signed Binary], and [Unsigned Binary].

　　

For the properties which are not explained in this section, please refer to the section 2.7. Object Menu III Specify object properties .

III. Exapmple

The following are the steps to create an [Multistate Indicator] object：

1.

[Read]：Specify the PLC register “D60” to read from. (The HMI model is PWS3261 and the PLC model is Mitsubishi FX2N)

2.

The [Format] is “LSB”.

3.

Select “Round _1” ; and the boder color is “Black” .


2. Instructions

4. On the [State] tab, add new states. There are 4 states in this object.


2. Instructions

5. Select bitmap on [Graphic] tab. This example does not display text but graphics. (These graphics are in “SYMBOLS.GBF” library)

6. The [Background Color] is “White” on the [Text] tab.


2. Instructions

The above-mentioned steps will create a [Multistate Indicator] object.

In this example, the [Numeric Entry] buttons are desgined for the numeric entry written in the PLC register. The [Multistate Indicator] objects will display the corresponding states according to the register

value. See Figure 127.

Therefore,for this example of the object, if one enters “1” on the HMI, then [Multistate Indicator] object will show “State 0”;if one enters “4”, the object will show “State 2” ; if one enters “8”, the object will show

“State 3” .

Figure 127. The [Multistate Indicator] object displayed the correspondant graphic

The [format] in this example is “LSB”, please refer to the following table:


2. Instructions

[

Numeric

Entry

(LSB)

1

2

4

8

Bit State

0 bit is ON; the others are OFF

1 bit is ON; the other are OFF



Multistate

Indicator

State 0

State 1

State 2

State 3

Graphics

I. Function

A [Range Indicator] displays one of several indicator labels depending on the register value. The HMI reads register values from the PLC and automatically caculates the difference according to the boundary value of current states. Then, the contents of current status are displayed on the HMI screen according to the caculated results.


2. Instructions

• [Ranges] Block：

♦ [Variable Limits]：Specify the minimum of the ranges are to be read from registers following the read location. If the [Read] address is “Dn”, the minimunof Range#0 is stored in “Dn+1”, the minimum of Range#1 is stored in “Dn+2”, and so on.

♦ [Constant Limits]：The minimum of the ranges is “Constant”.

- [Range#]：The number of ranges, 15 ranges is the most.

- [Minimum]：The minimum of ranges.

Note：numbers of ranges = number of states − 1

For the properties which are not explained in this section, please refer

to the Section 2.7. Object III Specify Object Properties .

III. Example

The following are the steps to create an [Range Indicator] object：


2. Instructions

State 0:

3000≤Distance

State 1:

2500≤ Distance< 3000

State 2:

Distance<2500

1. [Read]：Specify the PLC register “D90” to read from. (The

HMI model is PWS3261 and the PLC model is Mitsubishi

FX2N.)

2. Shape：Select “Raised _2”.

3. The minimum of ranges are constant limits.

4. The minimun of range#0 is “3000”; the minimun of range#1 is

“2500”.


2. Instructions

5. On the [State] tab, add new states.This object has 3 states.

6. On the [Text] tab, enter the text to states.

The above-mentioned steps will create a [Range Indicator] object. In this example, a [Numeric Entry] button is to input value in the PLC register; and a [Range Indicator] object is to calculate the result and display its corresponding state associated with the specified range. See

Figure 128.

If a user enters the input value “3500”, the correspondant range is range# 0. Therefore, the [Range Indicator] object will show “Success”

Object.


2. Instructions

[Range Indicator]

Object

Figure 128. [Range Indicator] object displayed the corresponding state

2.7.7.

[Numeric Display]

I. Function

The function of the [Numeric Display] object is to display the register value stored in PLC. This object does not support press-button function.

II. Properties


2. Instructions


♦ [Read]：Specify a register/bit location.

♦ [Format]：There are “BCD”, “SignedBinary”, “UnsignedBinary”, “Hexadecimal”, “32-bit Floating-point” and “Octal”.

• [Range] Block：

♦ [Edit] Button： When press this button, the displayed dialog box provides display format with high/low range.

- [None]：None of high/low limit.

- [Constant]：Enter the constant variable of high/low limit.


2. Instructions

- [Register]：Read high/low limit from register. If the read location is “Dn”, the high limit stored in “Dn+1” and the low limit stored in “Dn+2.

- [Display Format]：Specify the format to display when the variable is equal or more/less than high/low limit.

For the properties which are not explained in this section, please refer to the Section 2.7.1.6. [Set Value Button] and the Section 2.7. Object

III Specify Object Properties.

III. Example

The following are the steps to create an [Numeric Display] object：

1. [Frame]：Select “DD_Module_2”; and the bkg. color is

“White”.

2. [Read]：Read the value from the specified PLC register

‘D100’.(The HMI model is PWS3261 and the PLC model is

Mitsubishi FX2N)

3. [Character Color]： The character color is “Blue”.

4. [High Limit]: Specify ‘100’; [Low Limit]: Specify ‘30’.

5. If the variable is equal or less than ‘30’, it would display

“Light Blue”; If the variable is equal or more than ‘120’,it


2. Instructions

would display “Red”; If the variable is between ‘30’ and ‘120’, it would display “Blue” as original setting.

Above-mentioned steps will create a [Numeric display] object. In this example, a [Numeric Entry] button is to input value in the PLC register.

The variable will display different format on the screen according to its

range. See Figure 129.

Therefore, the variable will display “Light Blue” if one enters ‘10’; the variable will display “Blue” if one enters ‘50’; the variable will display

“Red” if one enters ‘120’.

Input Value ≤ 30, 30 < Input Value < 100, Input Value≥ 100


2. Instructions

Figure 129. An Illustration of the [Numeric Display] objects

2.7.8.

[Character Display]

I. Function

The function of a [Character Display] button is to provide an alphanumeric display for an ASCII variable in the PLC register. Note that it does not support press-button function.

II. Properties

• [Number of Character]：Specify the number of characters to display. It can have up to 28 characters which are limited by the width of the object.

For othet properties which are not explained in this Section, please refer to the

2.7. Object III Specify Object Properties .

III. Example

The following are the steps to create a [Prestored Message Display] object; this function can be applied in the factory for the product management：


2. Instructions

[Character Display]

Object

1. [Frame] ： Select “Outlined_2”; “Blue” border color and

“White” background color.

2. [Read]：Specify “D20”.(The HMI model is PWS3261; the

PLC model is Mitsubishi FX2N)

3. [Number of Characters] is 10.

4. The [Character Color] is “Dark Blue”.

2.7.9. [Message Display]

There are six types of Message Display Buttons：[Prestored Message],

[Moving Sign], [Data Terminal], [Time Display], [Data Display],

[Day-of-Week Display].

Please note that a Message Display Button contains only text; however an Indicator Button can have both text and graphic.


2. Instructions

2.7.9.1. [Prestored Message Display]

I. Function

The HMI reads the contact state (ON/OFF) or the register value from the PLC and automatically displays designed content on the HMI screen according to the state/value.

II. Properties

Please refer to the Section 2.7.6.1. [Multistate Indicator] for the

conpelte details.

III. Example

The following are the steps to create a [Prestored Message Display] object:

1. Frame：Select “Recessed_1”; and “Dark Blue” borlder color.

2. [Read]：Specify “W20”.

3. Select [Value] state.


2. Instructions

4. Add new states on [State] tab to configure 8 states.

5. Enter the desired text and specify the format of text on

[Text] tab.


2. Instructions

Above-mentioned steps will create a [Prestored Message Display] object. When pressed the [Multistate] button (under the [Prestored

Message Display] object) once, the HMI writes the command to PLC for state change. Therefore, once the state is changed, the [Prestored

Message Display] will display the corresponding state. See Figure 130.

For instance, once the state is “Blueberry”; the [Prestored Message

Display] object will display its corresponding content “Blueberry”.

Once the state is “Starfruit”, the [Prestored Message Display] object will display its corresponding content “Starfruit”.

Figure 130. The [Prestored Message Display] Object

[Presetored Message

Display] Object

I. Function

The [Moving Sign] object display its content one by one from right to left in circle.

When the HMI reads the value from a bit-location (ON/OFF) or register in PLC, the [Moving Sign] object will display its content or message according to the corresponding state on the screen.

II. Properties


2. Instructions

• [Speed] Block：

♦ [Number of Characters Per Shift] ： Specify the number of characters per shift.

♦ [Time Between Shifts (sec.)] ：Specify the time between shifts.

The unit is second.

For the properties which are not explained in this Section, please refer

to the Section 2.7. Object III Specify Object Properties .

III. Example

To design a [Moving Sign] object as the following:

1. Frame：Select “DD_Module_3”.

2. [Read]：Specify “D80”. (The HMI model is PWS3261; the

PLC model is Mitsubishi FX2N.)

3. Select [Value] to display the variable; the [Format] is “Unsigned Binary”.

4. The number of characters per shift is ‘1’ and the time between shifts is ‘0.5’ seconds.


2. Instructions

5. 3 states in all, the number of states can be modified on [State] tab.

6. Enter the text to its corresponding state on the [Text] tab to display.


2. Instructions

Above-mentioned steps will create a [Moving Sign] object. The left

[Multistate] button here is designed to write the command to PLC when pressed. Therefore, the [Moving Sign] object will display the

corresponding content according the current state. See Figure 131.

For example, if the state is “Morning”, the [Moving Sign] object will display “Good Morning! Good Morning! Good Morning!” The text here is the revolving display, moving per character from right to the left.


2. Instructions

[Moving Sign] Object

Figure 131. An Illustration of the [Moving Sign] objects

I. Function

The function of this object is to simulate ASCII terminal. The Workstation and the terminal can be connected with another specified communication port and the specified communication parameter to the data terminal displayed with ASCII /HEX mode.

Remember to set “ASCII Device” to communicate and specify the communication port. Note that this function is not applicable on all models; please refer to the Appendix A. - Table of the ADP 6.0

Featutres and HMI models .

II. Properties


2. Instructions


♦ [Read]: Specify a bit-location to read from. “ASCII Device” provides “RX”, “RXSTS”, “TX” and “TXSTS” contacts.

• [Display] Block:

♦ [Mode]: Display the data terminal in ASCII/HEX mode.

• [Data Buffer] Block:

♦ [Type]:

- “Local”: Select to display the current terminal data but the last display data is not included when the screen is changed.

- “Global”: Select to display the terminal data including the last one when the screen is changed.

♦ [Size]: Specify the number of rows in terminal data.

III. Example

The following are the steps to create a [Terminal Data] object:

1. Click [Application]/[Workstation Setup] to set “ASCII Device” as Contoller/PLC in the [Application Properties] dialog box.


2. Instructions

2. Specify the port/method used for the connection on the

[Connection] tab.


2. Instructions

3. Shape：Select “Outlined_2”; and the color is “Black”.

4. [Read]：Specify “RX”.(The HMI model is PWS3261N; the

Contoller/PLC is ASCII Device)

5. The mode is “ASCII” to display the terminal data.

6. The buffer type is “Local”.


2. Instructions

Above-mentioned steps will create a [Data Terminal] object; it displays the terminal data in ASCII model.

I. Function

The HMI reads the time value of the internal REAL TIME CLOCK

(RTC) and displays the content directly on the HMI screen. Note that this function is not applicable on all HMI models; please refer to the

Appendix A. - Table of the ADP 6.0 Feature and the HMI Models .

II. Properties


2. Instructions


♦ [HH:MM:SS]: Display Hour: Minute: Second.

♦ [HH:MM]: Display Hour: Minute.

III. Example

See

Section 2.7.9.5. [Date Display] III Example

.

I. Function

The HMI reads the date value of the internal REAL TIME CLOCK

(RTC) and displays the content directly on the HMI screen. Note that the function is not applicable on all HMI models; please refer to

Appendix A. - Table of the ADP 6.0 Features and the HMI Models .

II. Properties


2. Instructions


♦ [MM/DD/YY]: The format is Month/Date/Year.

♦ [DD/MM/YY]: The format is Date/Month/Year.

♦ [DD.MM.YY]: The format is Date.Month.Year.

III. Example

Figure 132. The [Time Display] and [Date Display] Objects

[TimeDisplay]

間

[Date Display]


2. Instructions

2.7.9.6. [Date of week Display]

I. Function

The HMI reads the date of week value from internal REAL TIME

CLOCK (RTC) and displays the content directly on the HMI screen.

Note that this function is only applicable on all HMI models; please refer the Appendix A. - Table of the ADP 6.0 Features and the HMI

Models .

II. Properties

The HMI will display the date of week automatically. The following is the [Text] tab in the [Date of week Display] dialog box.

III. Example


2. Instructions

2.7.10. [Bar Graph]

Two types of [Bar Graph]：[Normal] and [Deviation].

2.7.10.1. [Normal]

I. Function

The HMI reads the value of the PLC register and convert the data into a [Bar Graph] and then displays the graph on the HMI.

II. Properties

Date of week

Display


2. Instructions


♦ [Min.] ：Specify the minimum the bar graph can display.

♦ [Max.]：Specify the maximum the bar graph can display.

♦ [Variable target/range limits]: Select this option if the target value and the range limits are read from the PLC.

♦ [Target Variable] stored in a bit-location follows the [Read].

[Low Limit] stored in a bit location follows the [Target Variable]. The [High Limit] stored in a bit location follows the

[Low Limit]. For example, if [Read] is “D10”, [Target Variable] is “D11”, [Low Limit] is “D12”, [High Limit] is “D13”.

Regiser X X+1 X+2 X+3

Read Target Variable Low Limit High Limit

Example: D10 D11 D12 D13


♦ [Upward],[Downward],[Rightward] and [Leftward]：Select the direction to fill.

♦ [Color]：Specify the color of the bar graph.

♦ [Pattern]：Specify the pattern style to display.

♦ [Target]：Set the target to display.


2. Instructions

- [Value]：Specify the constant target value.

- [Color]：Specify the color of target line.

♦ [Ranges]：Select this option to fill the graph with a different color when the register value is beyond a normal range.

- [Low Range]：Specify the color to fill the graph with if the register value is equal to or less than the low range limit.

- [Limit]：Specify a constant for the low range limit.

- [High Range]：Specify the color to fill the graph with if the register value is greater than or equal to the high range limit.

- [Limit]：Specify a constant for the high range limit.


refer to the Section 2.7.

III Object Specify Object Properties

.

III. Example

The following are the steps to create a [Bar Graph] object:

Equal or less than low limit

Between high/low limit

1. Frame：Select “Recessed_1”; the bkg. color is “White”.

2. [Read]：Specify “@5” (Local Internal Memory).


4. The minimun is -32,768 and the maxmum is 32,767.


Equal or greater than low limit

2. Instructions

5. Check the option [Variable target/range limits].

6. When the register value is equal or less than the low limit, the graph will be filled with “Blue” color; when the register value is equal or greater than the high limit, the graph will be filled with “Red” color.

Above-mentioned steps will create a [Bar Graph] object. The [Numeric Entry] object here is to set the high/low limit and the left of the

[Bar Graph] is a scale. The [Low Limit] here is −15000; and the [High

Limit] is 15000. See Figure 133.

Variable ≤ −15000, the graph is filled with “Blue’; −15000 < Variable

< 15000, the graph is filled with “Black”; Variable ≥ 15000, the graph is filled with “Red”.


2. Instructions

Value ≤ −15000

Value = Scale

×1000

Value

≥

15000

Value = Scale

×1000

Figure 133. The Example of the [Bar Graph] object

2.7.10.2. [Deviation]

I. Function

The HMI reads the values of the PLC register and compares them with the normal value. Then the HMI converts the difference and presents it on a Bar Graph on the HMI.

II. Properties


2. Instructions


♦ [Variable Std Value/Deviation Limit]：Select this option if the standard value and deviation limit are read from the PLC. If

[Read] address is “D10”, [Standard Value] will be stored in

“D11”; [Deviation Limit] will be stored in “D12”.


♦ [Vertical],[Horizontal]：Choose the direction for filling a graph.

♦ [Standard Value]：Specify the constant standard value. The standard value will be a datum line on the bar graph.

♦ [Display Deviation Limit]：Select this option to fill the bar graph with selected color when the difference of the register value and the standard value is beyond the limit.

- [Limit]：Specify the constant limit.

Difference Value =│Variable − Standard Value│

- [Color]：Specify the color to fill the graph with when the differnce of the register value and the standard value is beyond the limit.


to the Section 2.7.10.1. [Bar Graph] and

Section 2.7. Object III Specify

Object Properties

.


2. Instructions

III. Example

The following are the steps to create a [Deviation] object:

Difference Value

< Limit

Difference Value

> Limit

Difference Value =│Variable − Standard Value│;

Standard Value =0; Limit =20000; Value = Scale

×1000

1. Frame：Select “Recessed_1”; and the bkg. color is “Yellow”.

2. [Read]：Specify “@5”. (Local Internal Meomory)

3. [Format] is “Signed Binary”.

4. The minimum is -32,768; the maximum is 32,767 on the deviation bar graph.

5. The deviation bar graph is horizontal direction.

6. The datum point is ‘0” on the deviation bar graph.

7. Specify the ‘Red’ color to fill the graph with when the differnce of the register value and the standard value is beyond the limit

‘20000’.


2. Instructions

I. Function

The function is to read a series of values from the related PLC register.

Then the HMI converts these values and presents it on a Trend Graph on the HMI.

Suppose that the register is “Dn” to read from and three curves in all.The data will be readed as the following format:

Value in Dn = “m” is the real sampling points;

Value in Dn+1 is the first point of Y direction on the curve #1;



Value in Dn+4 is the 2nd point of Y direction on the curve #1;



:

: and so on. The Workstation reads PLC registers from Dn to Dn+3m in total.

For example, if the value in Dn is m = 25 sampling points; the HMI will read data from 76 (=3×25+1) PLC registers.

II. Properties


2. Instructions

• [Control] Block：To control the trend graph by PLC.

♦ [Trigger Flag #]：The Trigger Flag No.of the tred graph is 12-

15 bits in CFR. The HMI reads data from PLC and display the trend graph when the Trigger Flag turns on.

♦ [Clear Flag #]：：The Clear Flag No.of the tred graph is 8-11 bits in CFR. The HMI clears the trend graph when that Clear

Flag tuns on.


♦ [Number of Points]：Specify the maximal number to diplay on the Y-direction.

♦ [Number of Grids]：Specify the number of evenly spaced horizontal grids to be displayed.

♦ [Grid Color]：Specify the color of the horizontal grids.

♦ [Curve # 1] ~ [Curve # 4]：Provide four curves for edit. When pressed [Edit] button, the dialog box will appear as the following：


2. Instructions

- [Minimum]：Specify the value corresponding to the lowest point on the trend graph. When the data is equal to or less than the [Minimum], the Workstation places the dot at the bottom pixel of the drawing area of the trend graph.

- [Maximum]：Specify the value corresponding to the highest point on the trend graph. When the register is equal to or greater than the [Maximum], the Workstation places the dot at the top pixel of the drawing area of the trend graph.

- [Pen Color]：Specify the color of the trending curve.

- [Line Style]：Specify the line style of the trending curve.



.

III. Example

The following are the steps to create a [Trend Graph] object:


2. Instructions

1. Frame：Select “Outlined_2”; and the bkg. color is “White.

2. [Read]：Specify “@100”. (Local Internal Memory)

3. [Format] is “Unsigned Binary”。

4. [Trigger Flag] and [Clear Flag] are #1。

5. Number of Points is 10.


2. Instructions

6. The minimum is “0”; and the maximum is 100.

I. Function

The Function is to read a series of values from the related PLC register.

Then the HMI converts these values and presents it on an X-Y Chart on the HMI.

Suppose that the register is “Dn” to read from; and two curves in all.

The data will be readed as the following format:

Value in Dn = “m” is the real sampling points;

Value in Dn+1 is the first point of X-axis on the curve #1;


2. Instructions

Value in Dn+2 is the first point of Y-axis on the curve #1;

Value in Dn+3 is the first point of X-axis on the curve #2;

Value in Dn+4 is the first point of Y-axis on the curve #2;

Value in Dn+5 is the 2nd point of X-axis on the curve #1;

Value in Dn+6 is the 2nd point of Y-axis on the curve #1;

Value in Dn+7 is the 2nd point of X-axis on the curve #2;

Value in Dn+8 is the 2nd point of Y-axis on the curve #2;

:

: and so on. The Workstation reads PLC registers from Dn to Dn+2m in total.

For example, if the value in Dn is m = 15 sampling points; the HMI will read data from 61 (=2×2×15+1) PLC registers.

II. Properties

• [Control] Block：To control the trend graph by PLC.

♦ [Trigger Flag #]：The Trigger Flag No.of the tred graph is 12-

15 bits in CFR. The HMI reads data from PLC and display the

XY chart when the Trigger Flag turns on.

♦ [Clear Flag #]：：The Clear Flag No.of the tred graph is 8-11 bits in CFR. The HMI clears the trend graph when that Clear

Flag tuns on.

• [Display] Block：


2. Instructions

♦ [Points],[Line],[Area over X-axis] and [Area over Y-axis]：See the illustration below.

♦ [Maximal Number of Points]：Specify the maximal number of points to display on XY chart.

♦ [Number of H Lines]：Specify the number of horizontal lines.

♦ [Number of V Lines]：Specify the number of vertical lines.

♦ [Color]：Specify the color of the lines.

♦ [Curve # 1] ~ [Curve # 4]：Provide four curves for edit. When pressed [Edit] button, the dialog box will appear as the following：

♦ [Data Set # 1] ~ [Data Set # 2]：When press [Edit] button, the dialog box will appear as the following：


2. Instructions

- [Vertical Min.] and [Vertical Max.] ：Specify the minimum and maximum value for Y-axis.

- [Horizontal Min.] and [Vertical Max]：Specify the minimum and maximum value for X-axis.

- [Color]：Specify the color for point/line.

- [Point Size]：Specify the size of the point to display.


refer to the Section 2.7. Object III Specify Object Properties .

III. Example

The following are the steps to create a [XY Chart] object:


2. Instructions

1. Frame：Select “Outlined_2”and the bkg. color is “White”.



4. [Trigger Flag] and [Clear Flag] are # 1.

5. Select “Line” type to display.

6. The maximal number of points is 5.


2. Instructions

7. The vertical and horizontal minimum are “0”, the maximum are

“100”.


2. Instructions

2.7.13. [Panel Meter]

There are two types of panel meters - [Round] and [Rectangular].

I. Function

The HMI reads the value from PLC register and reflects the value on the

Round Panel Meter object on the screen.

II. Properties

• [Needle] Block：

♦ [Color]：Specify the needle’s color.

♦ [Sweep Angles (deg.)] ：There are 300 degrees and 360 degrees.

• [Scale] Block：Specify the color and the number of ticks.

♦ Scale

- [Color]：Specify the color to display the scale.

- [Number of major ticks]：Specify the number of major ticks on the scale. If the number is less than 2, no ticks are


2. Instructions

displayed.

- [Number of minor]：Specify the number of minor ticks on the scale.

- [Display axis]：Check this option to display an arc as the axis of the scale.

♦ [Display mark]：Check this option to display marks on the scale.

- [Font]：There are “8X8” and “8X16” types.

- [Number of digits]：Specify the number of digits including precision and scale.

- [Decimal point position]：Specify the position of the marks digit. If the number is 0, no decimal point is displayed.

- [Min.] and [Max.]：Specify the minimum and maximum of the marks.

• [Target/Range] Block：Select [Edit] button, its dialog box will appear as the following.

♦ [Variable target/range limits]：The target value and the range limits are read from PLC. The “target value” is stored in a bitlcation whch is next to the [Read] location. The “low limit” is next to the “target value”. The “low limit” is next to the “high limit”. When the [Read] location is specified “D10”, the “target value” is stored in “D11”; the “low limit” is stored in “D12”; the “high limit” is stored in “D13”.

♦ [Display target indicator]：Check this option to display targetindicator.

- [Target value]：Specify the target value.


2. Instructions

- [Target needle color]：Specify the color for needle.

♦ [Display range scale]：Specify the color of range scale to display.

- [Low Range Color] and [High Range Color]：Specify the color to display on the scale when the value is less/greater than low/high range.

- [Low Limit] and [High Limit]：Specify the low limit and high limit constant.

For other propties which are not explained in this Section, please refer

to the 2.7. Object III Specify Object Properties .

III. Example

The following are the steps to create a [Round Pannel Meter] object:


2. [Format] is “Signed Binary”.

3. The minimum is -30,000 and the maximum is 30,000.

4. The sweep angle is 300 degrees.

5. The number of major ticks is ‘7’ and the number os minor ticks is ‘3’; the maximum mark is ‘30’ and the minimum number is

‘-30’.


2. Instructions

6. The low rang limit is ‘-10000’ and the color is “Blue”; the high range limit is ‘10000’ and the color is “Red”.

The properties of [Recrangle Panel Meter] are the same as [Round

Panel Meter]; please refer to the

Section 2.7.13.1. [Round Panel Meter] .


2. Instructions

I. Function

The HMI reads the register values in the PLC. Then it converts the values into a 360∘pie graph and displays the graph on the HMI screen.

II. Properties


♦ [Starting angle]：Specify the original angle of the pie graph.

♦ [Pie color]：Specify the color for filling the pie graph.

♦ [Bkg. color]：Specify the color of the unfilled part of pie graph.

♦ [Style]：Specify the pattern style for filling the pie graph.

♦ [Border]：Check this option to display the pie graph with a border.

♦ [Color]：Specify the border color of the pie graph.


refer to the Section 2.7.10.1. [Bar Graph] and the

Section 2.7. Object

Specify III Object Properties .


2. Instructions

III. Example

The following are the steps to create a [Pie Graph] object:

[Pie Graph]

Object

1. [Read]：Specify “W60”。

2. [Format] is “BCD”.

3. Specify the minimum is ‘0’ and the maximum is ‘100’ which the pie graph can display.

4. The starting angle is ‘0’.

5. Specify the pattern style, pie color, bkg. color and border color.


2. Instructions

A Pie object is drawn from (+) X-axis (starting angle = 0). When the input value is ‘20’, the area of the pie is one-fifth of a circle (= 20/100).

The following are the options in the [Dynamic Graphic] sub-menu:

[Animated Graphic], [GIF Graphic], [State Graphic], [Dynamic Circle] and [Dynamic Rectangle].

I. Function

This function enables a user to control a graph includes its position and moving-path to display on the HMI screen over PLC or not. For instance, the PLC can control the graphic movement along X-axis, Yaxis or the display of different graphics.

II. Properties

[Attributes] Tab


2. Instructions

• [Not Controlled by PLC]：Check this option that the graph is not controlled by PLC.

• [Graphic State] Block：

♦ [PLC controlled]：To display the graphic states controlled by

PLC.

♦ [Location dependent]：To display the different state according to the location.

♦ [Auto change]：To change the graphic state automatically.

- [Rate (Once per)]：Specify the rate to change the graphic state.

• [Path] Block：

♦ [PLC controlled] ： Controll the object’s movement path by

PLC.

♦ [Horizontal line]：To move the object along horizontal line.

♦ [Horizontal marquee]：To move the object along horizontal line with marquee.Check the [Dulplication] option to move the dulplicated graphes along horizontal line.

♦ [Vertical Line]：To move the object along the vertical line.

♦ [Vertical marquee]：To move the object along the vertical line with marquee. Check the [Dulplication] option to move the dulplicated objects along vertical line.

♦ [Connected Lines]：To move the object along the route of the connected lines.

- path：Double-click the left key on the object to display the movement path.

- Path Point：Click right key on the object to to select [Add

Path Point] or [Delete Path Point] from the drop-down list for the connected lines setup. Please refer to to select

III. Example

for the complete details.

Note that a curve path can be configured with the the various path points.

♦ [Still]：To change the state without movement.

• [Movement] Block：

♦ [Rate (pixels/sec.)]：Specify the rate of the movement.

- [One-way]：To move the object in one-way.

- [Two-way]：To move the object in two-way.


2. Instructions

• [Dulplicate]：Select this option to move the dulplicate objects with marquee; and the number of copies can be specified as well.

For the properties which are not explained in this Section, please refer to the

Section 2.7. III Object Specify Object Properties

.

[State] and [Text] Tab

Please refer to the Section 2.7. Object III Specify Object Properties for

the complete details.

[Path] Tab

一

. The [Graphic State] is [Location dependent]：On the [Path] tab, this feature enables a user to specify the graphic states to be cahnged according to different location. For instance, the point # 0 displays the graphic state in state # 0; the point # 1 displays the graphic state in state # 1. See below.

二

. The [Graphic State] is [Auto Change]：On the [Path] tab, the object changes state along the specified path. A user can setup the


2. Instructions

staring point and the ending point of path which is displayed on this tab.

III. Example

一

. To design a horizontal/vertical line as path：

Step 1：Double-click left key on the object to display the movement path.


2. Instructions

Step 2：Move the cursor on the point (icon is ‘ ’), then press leftkey to draw the movement path. The revised path should be marked with red line. See below.

Step 3：Click left-key elsewhere on the screen to display the object graphic.

二

. To design connected lines as path：

Step 1：Double-click left key on the object to display the movement path.

Step 2：Press left-key on the point of connected lines (icon is ‘ ’) to draw the movement path. The revised path should be marked with red line. See below.


2. Instructions

Step 3：Move the cursor to any one of points and press right key to select [Add Path Point] or [Delete Path Point] from the drop-down list. See below.


2. Instructions

Add Path Point

Step 4：Simutaneously, the way to edit a new path is to press left key on the added path point to drag movement path which is marked with red lines. See below.


2. Instructions

Figure 134 is to display the [Animated Graphic] object which is

moving along the specified [Connected Lines] path.

Figure 134. Moving along the [Connected Lines] path

IV. Example

一

. Not Controlled by PLC, One-way, Horizontal Line

[Animated

Graphic] Object

1. Check the option [Not Controlled by PLC].

2. The graphic state is [Location dependent].

3. The path is [Horizontal line].


2. Instructions

4. The movement rate is ‘10’ pixels/sec. and the direction is

[One-way].

5. This object is one state; and the graphic is “arrow 1”.


2. Instructions

Therefore, this animated graphic is not controlled by PLC and moving along horizontal line at 10 pixels/sec. in one-way; the graphics both

are “arrow 1”. See Figure 135.

Figure 135. Moving along [Horizontal line]

二

. Not Controlled by PLC, Two-way, Horizontal Marquee


2. Instructions

[Animated

Graphic] Object


2. The graphic state is [Location dependent].

3. The path is [Horizontal marquee].

4. The movement rate is 60 pixels/sec. and the direction is

[Two-way].


2. Instructions

5. The graphic state is location dependent, so it should setup two states.

Therefore, this object is not controlled by PLC and moving along horizontal marquee at 60 pixels/sec. This object will move to and fro

when it comes to the ending point. See Figure 136 and Figure 137.

Figure 136. Moving to the right side along horizontal marquee

Figure 137. Moving to the left side along horizontal marquee


2. Instructions

三

. Not Controlled by PLC, Auto Change, Connected Line

[Animated

Graphic] Object


2. The graphic state is [Auto change] and the [Rate] is “0.1 sec”.

3. The path is [Connected line].

4. The movement rate is 60 pixels/sec.; the direction is [Twoway].


2. Instructions

5. Setup 8 graphic for auto change. The example takes 8 wheels with different angle to cause rolling image when the graphic state is changed automatically.


2. Instructions

6. Add more points to make the movement path look smoother.

Therefore, this animated graphic object is not controlled by PLC and moving at 60 pixels/sec. along the curve to and fro. The graphic state

is auto change to display rolling effect. See Figure 138.


2. Instructions

Figure 138. Moving along the curve with auto change in two-way

I. Function

This feature is to display the GIF graphic controlled by PLC or not.

II. Properties

• [Graphic]：Select the graphic to display form the drop-down list, the graphic will appear on the [View] block.

• [Profile] Block：Modify the location and size of objects.

For the properties which are not explained in this Section, please refer to the Section

2.7. Object III Specify Object Properties

.

III. Example


To design a [GIF Graphic] object as the following:

2. Instructions

Select a GIF graphic form the [Graphic] drop-down list; specify the

PLC register to read from (if check the option [Controlled by PLC]) and modify its profile. The specified GIF graphic will appear on the object as below.

I. Function

This object is to display one of several bitmaps depending on the state of PLC register constantly.


2. Instructions

II. Properties

• [States] Block：

♦ [Auto Change]：Check this option to change the graphic automatically.

- [Change Rate (Hz)]：Specify the rate to change.



.

III. Example


2. Instructions


2. Select [Value] to display.


4. Check the option [Auto Change]; [Change Rate (Hz)] is “0.5 sec”.

[State Graphic]

Object

5. 14 states in all. Add states on the [State] tab and select specific graphic to display on the [Graphic] tab.


2. Instructions

Therefore, the object changes its state per 0.5 sec controlled by PLC repeatly. And a pumping effect will be generated in the HMI screen.

Figure 139 displays the graphics corresponding state 0~2.

State 0 State 1

Figure 139. The object displays auto change (ex. state 0~2)

State 2

I. Function

A [Dynamic Circles] object is to change its position, radius and color according its controlling registers.

II. Properties


2. Instructions


♦ [Variable Central Point]: The position of central point is controlled by PLC.

♦ [Variable Radius]: The length of radius is controlled by PLC.

♦ [Variable Color]: The color of the object is controlled by PLC.

• [Display Format] Block: Specify the format of the object to display.



.

III. Example

Suppose that dynamic circle’s central point, radius and color are controlled by PLC. The [Read] address is “D430”.

The HMI can read four datum once at most, and the [Read] address here are D430, D431, D432 and D433. The following is the table of

PLC address and graphic properties.


2. Instructions

Re-central point

Re-radius

Fix Color

Dn= Radius

Dn+1= X

Dn+2= Y

Dn+3= Color

Re-central point

Re-radius

Fix Color

Dn= Radius

Dn+1= X

Dn+2= Y

Re-central point

Re-radius

Re-coloring

Dn= Radius

Dn+1= Color

Fix Central

Point

Re-radius

Fix Color

Dn= Radius

Re-central

Point

Re-radius

Fix Color

Re-central point

Fix Radius

Fix Color

Dn= X

Dn+1= Y

Dn+2= Color

Dn= X

Dn+1= Y

Fix Central

Point

Fix Radius

Re-coloring

Dn= Color

I. Function

A [Dynamic Rectangle] object is to change its position, radius and color according its controlling registers.

II. Properties


♦ [Variable Position]: The position of the object is controlled by

PLC.

♦ [Variable Size]: The length of the object is controlled by PLC.

♦ [Variable Color]: The color of the object is controlled by PLC.

• [Anchor Point]: Specify the anchor point for the dynamic rectangle whose position is variable and size is fixed.


2. Instructions

• [Display Format] Block: Specify the format of the dynamic rectangle to display.



.

III. Example

Suppose that the position, size and color are variable which is controlled by PLC. The [Read] address is “D420”.

The HMI reads five data from PLC once at most. The [Read] addresses here are D420, D421, D422, D423 and D424. The following is the table of PLC address and graphic properties.

Re-positione Re-position Fix Position Fix Color Re-position Re-position Fix Position

Re-size

Re-coloring

D420= Width

D421= Height

D422= X

D423= Y

D424= Color

Re-size

Fix Color

D420= Width

D421= Height

D422= X

D423= Y

Re-size

Re-coloring

D420= Width

D421= Height

D422= Color

Re-size

Re-coloring

D420= Width

D421= Height

Fix Size

Re-coloring

D420= X

D421= Y

D422= Color

Fix Size

Fix Color

D420=X

D421=Y

Fix Size

Fix Color

D420= Color


2. Instructions

The [Historical Display] drop-down list includes the followings ：

[History Trend Graph], [Historical Data Table] and [Historical Event

Table].

The [Historical Display] datum are stored in logging buffers, a user should assign its area and size first. Logging buffer is to store the sampling datum in HMI battery backup RAM.

Note that this feature is not applicable on all HMI models; please refer to Appendix A.- Table of the ADP 6.0 Features and HMI Models .


2. Instructions

Logging Buffer:

Select the [Logging Buffers] tab from [Application]/ [Workstaion

Setup]. Its dailog box will appear as the following.

Figure 140. The [Logging Buffers] Tab

1. [Source Address]：Specify the starting address to read from, e.g. “C20” is starting address of a block of PLC registers from which the logging buffer reads from. See Figure 140.

2. [Size]：Specify the size of a record to read form at a time, e.g.

[Size] = “4” represents 4 Words = C20，C21，C22，C23.

3. [Total]：Specify the total to store in, e.g. “1500” represents that the HMI reads 4 Words each time sampling 1500 times in total.


2. Instructions

4. [Time]/[Date]：Check this box to record the [Time]/[Data] while sampling.

5. [Auto Stop]：Check this box to stop sampling when it reaches the specified total = 1,500. If the option is not selected, the 1 st data will be overwritten when the 1501 st

data records is readed.

6. [Triggered By]：Select “Timer” to trigger period on fixed time or select PLC to be triggered by PLC. If select PLC for triggered by, it’s triggered by the specified corresponding bitlocations Dn+2, Dn+3 and Dn+4.

7. [Time Interval]：Specify how often the logging buffer gets one record of data from Timer. (Unit: sec.)

After completing the setup on [Logging Buffers] tab , a user can create three types of [Historical Display] objects：

I. Function

The HMI may have a fixed sampling period or the PLC may as well initiate a data read from the specified registers and then store the data in the logging buffers in the HMI memory. After a period of sampling, the data then is converted to continuous curve(s) and displayed on

HMI.

II. Properties


2. Instructions

• [Data] Block：

♦ [Logging Buffer #]：Specify the number of the logging buffer where the historical data is stored, numbered 1 to 12.

♦ [Format]：“BCD”, “Signed Binary” and “Unsigned Binary”.

• [Time/Date] Block：

♦ [Display Date] and [Display Time]：Check this box (es) to display date and time; click [Format] button to setup. (This feature is inapplicable on PWS700)

♦ [Color]：Specify the color of characters to be displayed.


♦ [Number of Grids]：Specify how many evenly spaced horizontal lines shall be displayed.

♦ [Grid Color]：Specify the color of the horizontal grids.

♦ [Curve #1-#4]：There are four curves to be selected. If click

[Edit] button, its dialog box will appear as the following.


2. Instructions

- [Word No]：Specify the number of the words to display on the historic trending curve.

- [Minimum] and [Maximum]：Specify the value corresponding to the lowest and highest point on the historical trending curve.

- [Pen Color]：Specify the color to draw the trending curve.

- [Line Style]：Specify the line style of the trending curve.

III. Example

To design a [Historical Trending Graph] as the following：

To use [Historical Trend Graph]; first assign its corresponding logging buffers size and area. A user must setup the ptoerties e.g. source address, size, total on the [Logging Buffers] tab in [Application]/

[Workstation Setup]. After setup, the [Historical Trending Buffer] object can read the data stored in the memory.


2. Instructions

Steps to creat a [Historical Trending Graph] object as the following：

1. Frame：Select “Recessed_1”；Bkg. color：Black.

2. Read the data form the logging buffer #1.


4. The number of grids is ‘11’ and the grid color is “Green”.


2. Instructions

5. Check four curves to display; curve #1 displays the data record sored in the word “0”. Curve #2 displays the data record sored in the word “1”…etc. See below.

6. The minimum value is “0”; the maximum value is “65535”; and specify the different color to each curve.

The steps above will create a [Historical Trending Graph] ob ject. The four curves display the data stored in logging buffer #1 on the

object which has 11 grids on it. See Figure 141.


2. Instructions

Figure 141. The [Historical Trending Graph] object

I. Function

The HMI may have a fixed sampling period or the PLC may as well initiate a data read from the specified registers and then store the data in the logging buffers in the HMI memory. After a period of sampling, the data then is converted to numeric data table and displayed on HMI.

II. Properties


2. Instructions


♦ [Number of Data Field]：Specify how many data fields to display; it is up to 10 data fields.

♦ [Field Atteibute] button，its dialog box will appear as the following：


2. Instructions

- [Starting Position]：Specify the position of a data field to display. Note that if the starting position is 0 for field

No.1; the time will display in field no.1, the date will display in field no.2 and the first data field will display in field no.3. If there is no time/date displayed, the first data field will be displayed in field no.1.

- [Word No.]：There are 0~31 numbers of character can be specified.

- [Data Size]：“1” represents one-word；“2” represents double-word.

- [Data Format]：There are four options [BCD], [Signed Binary], [Unsigned Binary] and [Hexadecimal].

- [Display Color]：Specify the character color of a data field.

- [Leading Zeros]：Check this box to display leading zeros.

- [Decimal Pt. Position] ：Specify how many number of digits following the decimal point.

- [Int. Digits] ：Specify how many digits to the left of the decimal point.

- [Frac. Digits]：Specify how many digits to the right of the


2. Instructions

decimal point.


to the Section 2.7.16.1 [Historical Trending Graph] .

III. Example

To design a [Historical Data Table] object as the following：

Suppose that there is historical data stored in logging buffer #1.

The object’s properties as the following：

1. Frame：Select “Outlined_2”；the color is “Black”.

2. Read the historical data from logging buffer #1.

3. Display date and time in data table.

4. The number of data field is “4”.


2. Instructions

5. The properties in four fields as the following：


2. Instructions

The steps above will create a [Historical Data Table] object. The HMI will read the historical data recorded in logging buffers #1 and display

its content on the screen. See Figure 142.

Figure 142. The [Historical Data Table] object

I. Function

The HMI may set a fixed sampling period or the PLC may as well initiate a data read from the specified registers or the related bits in

LSB. Thereafter, the data is converted into pre-defined message text(s) and then displays line-by-line on the HMI.

II. Properties


2. Instructions

• [Data] Block：

♦ [Logging Buffer #]：Specify the number of the logging buffer where the historical data is stored, numbered 1 to 12.

♦ [Type]：

- [Value]: 256 states in all (0-255), 0 represents state 0; 1 represents state 1…etc.

- [LSB]: 16 states in all, the HMI takes the bit number of the least bit that is ON as the state number.

♦ [Format]: Only applicable on [Value], there are [BCD], [Signed

Binary], [Unsigned Binary], [Signed Binary] three options.

For the properties which are not explained in this Section, please refer to

Section 2.7.16.1. [Historical Trend Graph] and

Section 2.7. Object

III Specify Object Properties .

There are four types of [Alarm Display] in its sub-menu：[Alarm

History], [Active Alarm List],[Alarm Frequency Table] and [Alarm

Marquee].


2. Instructions

To use objects obove, a user must set up the address of alarm block and its parameters. The HMI reads the value stored in PLC and displays its corresponding messages, it’s up to 512 messages can be set.

Note that this feature is only applicable on some models, please refer to Appendix A. - Table of the ADP 6.0 Features and HMI Models .

Alarm Setup:

Select [Application]/[Alarm Setup], its dialog box will appear as the

following. See Figure 143.

Figure 143. The [Alarm Setup] Dialog Box

• [Address of Alarm]：To use a bit (LSB) as a corresponding alarm address. If D130 is the starting position and the number of alarm is set 160; the HMI will monitor 160 bits = 10 words and this corresponds to D130, D131, and D132……D139.

When bit D130 turns on, the HMI will sample and record an alarm message. It’s up to 512 alarm messages can be set.

• [Number of Alarms]：Specify the number of alarms.

• [Scan Time(Second)]：Specify the sampling time to monitor the PLC data, 1~10 second(s).


2. Instructions

• [Number of Records in Alarm History]：Specify the maximum number of event stored in the alarm buffer. For example 100 means the 101 st be overwritten.

alarm event happens the 1 st

alarm message will

• Table：

♦ [Message] Column：Enter the text to the alarm message. The format can be modified in its dialog box.

♦ [ACK] Column：Acknowlege the message which has received to conceal the alarm.

♦ [Screen] Colum：Specify the screen to display when the alarm occurs.

After the setup compeleted, there are four types of [Alarm Display] objects below：

I. Function

The HMI reads the reference bits in the PLC with fixed period and then activates the corresponding alarm massages. Thereafter, this command enables the HMI to show its alarm history in the sequence as an [Alarm History Table].

II. Properties

[Attributes] Tab


2. Instructions

• [Status Display] Block ：

♦ [Date] and [Time]：Check this box to display the date and time and select the [Format] button to specify its format.

♦ [Alarm Number]：Check this box to display alarm number.

♦ [Color]：Specify the color of the message.

[Text] Tab


2. Instructions

On this tab, it enables a user to setup the [Font], [Color] and [Bkg.

Color] for alarm messages.

III. Example

To design an [Alarm History Table] object as the following：

[Alarm History

Table] Object

一

. Alarm Setup：


2. Instructions

1. Select [Application]/[[Alarm Setup], its dialog box will appear as in Figure 144.

2. Specify [Alarm of Alarm Block] “@230” and ‘16’ alarms; the maximum number of records is limited to ‘100’.

3. The scan time is set ‘1’ second to sample the PLC data.

4. Enter the text in message block, select if acknowledge the alarm and screen to display.

Figure 144. An Illustration of [Alarm Setup] dialog box

二

. Setup the properties：

1. Frame：Select “Recessed_1”；Color：Blue.

2. Display time and alarm number state; the color is “yellow”.


2. Instructions

3. Note that the message, ack, screen which set in the [Alarm

Setup] dialog box will show on the [Text] tab.

4. The message color is “red”; the bkg. color is “black”.


2. Instructions

The steps above will create a [Alarm History Table] object; See Figure

145. This example uses 16 On/Off buttons to send the alarm mes-

sage.The HMI will read the reference bits in the PLC at fixed period; then convert the data into its corresponding messages in sequence and display on the screen.

Note that the alarm state “A” represents activate; “C” represents clear.

On/Off Button

Alarm State

Figure 145. The [Alarm History Table] object

2.7.17.2. [Active Alarm List]

I. Function

The HMI displays only the active alarms that its refernce bit in PLC =

ON and sort the data according to the order of the state number.

II. Properties

[Alarm History

Table] Object


2. Instructions

State No. in order

All the properties are the same as [Alarm History Table] object, please

refer to Section 2.7.17.1. [Alarm History Table] .

III. Example

The steps to create an [Active Alarm Table] object are the same as an

[Alarm History Table] object. A user must complete the alarm setup

first, and then specify its properties. Pleaser refer to Section 2.7.17.1.

[Alarm History Table] .

On/Off

Button

[Active Alarm

Table] Object


2. Instructions

Figure 146. The [Active Alarm Table] Object

The steps above will create a [Active Alarm Table] object as in Figure

146. This example also uses 16 On/Off button to start the alarm mes-

sages. The HMI displays only the active alarms that its refernce bit in

PLC = ON and sort the data according to the order of the state number.

I. Function

The HMI summarizes the number of occurrence of each alarm which be monitored and display on the screen.

.

II. Properties

The properties are the same as [Alarm Frequency Table] object, please


III. Example

The steps to create an [Alarm Frequency Table] object are the same as an [Alarm History Table] object. A user must complete the alarm setup


2. Instructions

first, and then specify its properties; please refer to

Section 2.7.17.1.

[Alarm History Table] .

On/Off

Button

The number of occurrence

Figure 147. The [Alarm Frequency Table] Object

The steps above will create a [Alarm Frequency Table] object as in

Figure 147. This example also uses 16 On/Off button to start the alarm

message. The HMI will display the number of occurrence of each alarm on the screen.

[Alarm

Frequency

Table] Object

I. Function

The HMI displays alarm messages of the active alarms as a moving sign.

II. Properties


2. Instructions

The properties are the same as [Alarm History Table] object, please


III. Example

The steps to create an [Alarm Marquee] object are the same as an

[Alarm History table] object. A user must complete the alarm setup first, and then specify its properties; pleaser refer to

Section 2.7.17.1.

[Alarm History Table]

.

[Alarm Marquee]

Object

Figure 148. The [Alarm Marquee] Object

The steps above will create an [Alarm Marquee] object as in Figure

148. This example also uses 16 On/Off buttons to start the alarm


On/Off

Button

2. Instructions

message. The HMI displays the message of active alarms as a continual moving sign on the screen.

2.7.18. Sub-macro

I. Function

[Sub-macro] is the macro’s sub-application. The main function is to call commands directly. Some common functions or operation commands which are used frequently can be edited and saved in [Submacro] for call commands.

II. Properties

There are 512 options in [Sub-macro], please refer to Chapter 8 Macro for the complete details.

III. Example


2. Instructions

Figure 149. An example of the [Sub-screen] edit screen


2. Instructions

2.8. Library

There are five commands in [Library] menu：They are [Bitmap

Library], [Save as Shape], [Shape Library Manager] and [Text Pool].

The main function is to edit, import and export the bitmaps, shapes, fonts or text pool.

2.8.1. [Bitmap

[Bitmap Library] is mainly to import, export and edit the bitmaps.

Select [Library]/[Bitmap Library], the dialog box will be as the following.

• [Graphics]：List all of the graphics for selection.

• [View]：Display the specified graphic to view.

• [Compilation] Block：

♦ [Color Dithering]：Process the graphic (16-bit, 24-bit or JPEG) to display the image vividly as the original one on the screen.


2. Instructions

There are [8-color],[16-color] and [256-color] options, The higher color is selected , the higher contrast of the figure will be displayed.

• [Import from] ： Allows user to import bitmap(s) from a selected library *.GBF or *.GIF graphics.

• [Export to]：Allows user to export bitmap(s) to a selected library *.GBF.

• [Import]：Import the graphic into bitmap library from computer. The importable formats of graphics include Bitmap

Image (*.BMP), Jpeg Image Files (*.JPG), AutoCad Files

(*.DWG), AutoCad Files (*.DXF), PWS bit mapped graphic

(*.BMG) and GIF Files (*.GIF).

• [Export] ： Export the graphic stored in bitmap library to computer.

• [Rename]：Modify the name of the graphic.

• [Copy]：Select to export selected bitmap to the clipboard.

• [Paste]：Select to import a bitmap from the clipboard. When pressed, a dialog box will appear and ask name for the imported graphic.

• [Delete]：Select to delete selected bitmap.

• [Flip and Rotate]：Allow a user to change a bitmap’s orientation. When pressed, the dialog box will appear and flip or rotate degree options are available as the following.

• [Inverse Color]：Invert a bitmap’s colors.

• [Scretch]：Adjust the width and height of a bitmap.


2. Instructions

• [Trim]：Allows user to cut unused area around a bitmap.

[Font Library] supports all windows fonts; it enables a user to define up 16 types. A user can define the fonts of their own choice to design a more attractive interface. See below.

Select [Library]/[Font Library], its dialog box will be as in Figure 150

shown on the screen.


2. Instructions

Figure 150. The [Font Library] Dialog Box

• [Import from]：Select to import fonts into font library.

• [Export to]：Select to export fonts to font library.

• [Modify]：Modify the format of selected font. When pressed, the ddailog box will appear as the following.


2. Instructions

2.8.3. [Save as Shape]

This command allows the user to save shape(s) to a file. A shape must be selected before the user can save the shape. Multiple shapes may be selected simultaneously.

The function of [Save as Shape] is to save the basic objects (ex. Line,

Rctangle, Ellipse, Circle, Polygon, Pie, Freeform, Arc, Scale…etc) or

multiple shapes in [Library]. See Figure 151.

Select [Library]/[Save as Shape], the dialog box will be as the following. A user can select the library from the drop-down list to save and name for shape in [Shape Name] block.

Figure 151. The [Save as Shape] Dialog Box


2. Instructions

2.8.4. [Shape Library Manager]

The function of [Shape Library Manager] is mainly to build a entire attributes management.

Select [Library]/[Shape Library Manager], the dialog box will be as the

following. See Figure 152.

Figure 152. The [Shape Library Manager] Dialog Box

• [New]：Create a new shape library.

• [Open]：Open an existing shape library.

• [Save]: Saves the active shape library to a file.

• [Save As]: Allows user to choose which file to save to.

• [Close]: Select to close the [Shape Library Manager]. If the changes have not been saved, the dialog box will ask for save

• [Copy]: Copy selected shape to clipboard.

• [Paste]: Import the shape from the clipboard.

• [Cut]: Moves selected shape to clipboard.


2. Instructions

• [Delete]: Deletes selected shape.

• [Properties]: Click to display the properties of the selected shape. See the following figure.

♦ [View]：Display the shape to view.

- [All States]：Select to view all states of selected shape.

- [State] option：Select to view individual states of selected shape.

♦ [Name]：Specify the name of selected shape.

♦ [Purpose]：The function of the selected shape, there are [Push

Button] and [Genernal] options.

♦ [Oringnal Size] ： Display the width and height of original shape.

♦ [Minimal Size]：Specify the minimal width and height of selected shape.

♦ [Keep Original Aspect Ratio]：Select this option to keep the the size of shape in original ratio.

♦ [Display]：Show the shape used in States, there are [Always]


2. Instructions

and [At State] options.

♦ [User Changeable] ： Select changeable shape to change its properties including frame/border color, background color, pattern color and pattern.

♦ [Profile]：Secify the position of the component object and display the specified view here.

2.8.5. [Tex Pool]

The function of [Text Pool] is mainly to manage and edit the texts used in application file commonly.

Select [Library]/[Text Pool], the dialog box enables a user to edit and

manage the texts. See Figure 153.

Step:

1. Enter the desired texts in the [Text Pool] dialog box to save in.

See below.

Figure 153. The [Text Pool] Dialog Box

2.

Click the object to edit an object which has texts as in [Text

Pool], then select [Edit]/[State and Text Management]. See below.


2. Instructions

Figure 154. The [State & Text Management] Dialog Box

3. In [State & Text Management] dialog box, select [Replace By] to edit. A user can select the desired text which edited in [Text Pool] to display.


2. Instructions

4. The following [List] object displays the text which edited in

[Text Pool].


2. Instructions

2.9. Application

The [Application] menu is a general management area for the Workstation and the software. One can set up the parameters of the configuration for the Workstation such as PLC type, Workstation type, logging buffers and alarm setup. In addition, Compile and Download are also available in this menu.

Select [Appliaction], the menu will be as in Figure 155,

Figure 155. The [Application] Menu

2.9.1. Setup]

[Workstation Setup] is to set up the parameters of the Workstation.

Select [Application]/[Workstation Setup], its dialog box wil be as in

Figure 156.


2. Instructions

Figure 156. The [Application Properties] Dialog Box

On the [General] tab, a user can set up panel/Workstation, controller/

PLC, startup language and screen, and control block and status block.

See Figure 156.

• [Application Name]: Enter the name of the application.

• [Panel/Workstation Type]: Specify the model of Workstation.

Note the resolution, size and color while selecting.

• [Programming Type]：Select [Macro] or [Standard].

• [Controller/PLC Type]: Specifies the type of PLC the Workstation will communicate with. ADP 6.0 later, the “ModBus

TCP/IP Device” option is available.


2. Instructions

• [Printer Type]: Specifies the type of printer the Workstation will print to.

• [Multi-lingual Support]: Check the option to support multilingual and specify the startup language. It supports up to 5 languages including “Arabic”, “Chinese Simplified”, “Chinese

Tradtional”, “Cyrillic”, “English”, “Greek”, “Japanese”, “Korean”, “Thai”, “Turkish”, and “Western European”. Please refer to

2.4.2. [Language 1] ~ [Language 5]

for setup.With this option enabled, you can maintain only one application file for a machine that can support up to 5 languages.

• [Control Block]：Specify the PLC address to control and size, the minimum size is 2 Words, the maximum size is 32 Words

(The maximum size is 6 for recipe). The control block enables the PLC to control actions on the Workstation such as change screen, print, send recipes….etc. Please refer to Chapter 4.

Control & Status Block for complete details.

• [Status Block]：Specify the starting address for Status Block; the fixed size is 10 Words. The Status Block provides the communication between the Workstation and the PLC. The

HMI will write a continuous block of data in. Please refer to

Chpater 4. Control & Status Block .

• [Data Format]：Specify the data format to read in.

• [Start-up Screen] ： Specify the screen to display once the power is ON.

On the [Connection] Tab, it enables a user to add or delete device to connect with and set up the address, connection method or IP. See

Figure 157.


2. Instructions

Figure 157. The [Connection] Tab (Multi-link)

• [Add]：Add new device(s) to connect with including Mutilink- select PLC type to connect with. For the steps or methods related to setup, please refer to Chapter 5. Multi-link .

• [Remove]：Remove the connected device, the no. 1 can be removed.

• [Rename]：Modify the device name and type but the device type cannot be modified in No. 1. To modify the device type in

No. 1, a user must change it on the [General] tab.

• [PWS] Block：

♦ [Address]：Set up the station of Workstation. Once the multilink is made, the address can be repeated and the range is

0~255.

♦ [Port/method used for the connection]：Specify the port and method to connect with PLC or other HMI models including


2. Instructions

“COM1”, “COM2”, “Ethernet(Cross-link)”,“COM1”(Multilink slave) and“COM2” (Multi-link slave) and Ethernet (Multilink slave).

The HMIs made multi-link (one master; multi-slave); See Figure

157：

Note that this feature is only applicable on some models, please refer to Appendix A. - Table of the ADP 6.0 Features and HMI

Models .

• [Multi-link] Block：Specify a PLC to connect with HMIs.

♦ [This PWS is a multi-link master]：Check this option to specify the PWS as a master.

♦ [Master Port]：Specify the port which connects master with slaves including “COM1”, “COM2” and “Ethernet”.

♦ [Commom Register Block (CRB)]：Specify the Starting location for the “CRB” which master and slaves use.

♦ [CRB Size]：Specify the size of “CRB”.

♦ [Commom On/Off Block (COB)]：Specify the starting location for “COB”.

♦ [COB Size]：Specify the size of “COB”.

The HMIs made Cross-link (all masters); See Figure 158.

Note that this feature is only applicable on some models; please refer to Appendix A. - Table of the ADP 6.0 Features and HMI

Models .


2. Instructions

Figure 158. The [Connection] Tab (Cross-link)

Figure 158 takes “Simatic S7-200 (via PPI; 1-to-1)” as example.

• [IP Address] ： Specify the IP address of other HMI. The specified HMI connects with PLC through other HMI.

• [PWS Type]：Specify the model to connect with PLC. (other

HMI).

For the setup of Multi-link and Cross-link, please refer to Chapter 6.

Ethernet Connection .

Note that the transmission parameters for the HMI and the PLC must be identical as they are linked together. After the PLC model specified, the ADP will set up as the PLC default, but a user must if its setup is identical with the PLC

For the setup of each PLC, please refer to thier PLC manual or Ch 9.

Communication between PLC and PWS .


2. Instructions

On [Miscellaneous] tab, it enables a user to set up recipe function and

write time and data ti PLC. See Figure 159.

Figure 159. The [Miscellaneous] Tab

• Recipe Block：Specify the memory of recipe data, please refer to Chapter 3. Recipe and Section 4.3. Recipe Register Block .

Note that this feature is only applicable on some models; please refer to Appendix A. - Table of the ADP 6.0 Features and HMI models .

• [Write time and date to PLC]: Select this option to enable the

Workstation to write time and date to the RTC in the PLC.

Please refer to Section 4.4. Time_Block .

• [Touch Screen/External Keys] Block：Specify the format of buffer.


2. Instructions

• [Start up Delay (Sec.)] Block ： Specify the length of time before the screen start up.

Logging Buffer Block is to collect data from battery backup RAM. It is a contiguous data block and there are twelve buffers available. Note that this feature is only applicable on some models; please refer to

Appendix A. - Table of the ADP 6.0 Features and HMI Models .

When design a [Historical Display] object, a user must set up the

logging buffer’s area and size first. See Figure 160. Concerning the

steps to set up and data read from, please refer to Section 2.7.16.

[Historical Display] .

Figure 160. The [Logging Buffer] Tab


2. Instructions

• [Source Address]：Specify the starting address of a block of registers in the PLC from which the Logging Buffer reads data.

Here the souce address is specified “C20” as in Figure 160.

• [Size]：Specify the size of a record. [Size] = “4” represents 4

Words = C20，C21，C22，C23.

• [Total]: Specify the maximum number of records a Logging

Buffer can have; The total “1500” represents reading 4 Words at a time and reading 1500 times.

• [Time]/[Date] ： Select this option to record [Time]/[Date] while sampling.

• [Auto Stop]：The logging buffer stops collecting data after its buffer is full if this option is selected. Otherwise, when the

1,501 data records reads the 1 st

data will be overwritten.

• [Trigger By]：Select “Timer” to collect data at a fixed period or select “PLC” to trigger. If the “PLC” is selected, the tigger is controlled by corresponding bit-location “Dn+2”, “Dn+3 and

Dn+4.

• [Time Interval]：Specify how often the Logging Buffer reads one record of data from the PLC (Unit: sec.) when the “Timer” is selected.

When a user wants to copy the screen or upload the application to

ADP, the HMI will ask for the password.


2. Instructions

Figure 161. The [Password] Tab

2.9.2. Table]

[Tag Table] enables a user to name for the PLC address and specify

the refresh rate. See Figure 162.

Select [Application]/[Tag Table], the edit window will be as the following.


2. Instructions

Figure 162. The [Tag Table] window

2.9.3. Setup]

To use [Historical Display] object, a user must set up its address andparameters first. Then the HMI will display the corresponding messages after reading the PLC value, it is up to 512 messages can be

specified. See Figure 163. For the alarm setup, please refer to

Section

2.7.17. [Historical Display] .

Select [Application]/[Alarm Setup], its edt window will be as the following.


2. Instructions

Figure 163. The [Alarm Setup] window

• [Address of Alarm Block]：Display the data with LSB format.

If “D130” is the starting address, the HMI monitors 160 bits

=10 words, the corresponding addresses are

D130,D131……D139. When D130 No.0=ON, the HMI will sample and record the alarm data. There are up to 512 messages available.

• [Number of Alarm]：Specify the number of alarm to display.

• [Scan Time(Second)]：Specify the period to sample the PLC data which is monitored by HMI, 1 to 10 second(s) is available.

• [Number of Records in Alarm History Buffer]：Specify the number of records can be saved in alarm history buffer. For example 100 means when the 101 st

alarm event happened, the

1 st

alarm message will be overwritten.

• Table：

♦ [Message] Column：Enter the text to the alarm message. The format can be modified in its dailog box.

♦ [ACK] Column ： Acknowledge the message which has received to conceal the alarm.

♦ [Screen] Column ： Specify the screen to display when the alarm occurs.


2. Instructions

[Commom Keys] is to edit the properties of external keys. The feature is commom whatever the screen is. For example, if “K00” means go to the 1 st

page, press “K00” will go to the 1 st

page in each screen.

Select [Application]/[Commom Keys], the edit window enables a user

to set up its function. Figure 164 displays all the commom keys which

can be specified in PWS6600.

Figure 164. The [Commom Keys] Edit Window ( HMI model

PWS6600)

When pressed the [Function] key, the window will display the

functions to specify. See Figure 165.


2. Instructions

Figure 165. Specify the Function

If a user wants to define the feature just applicable on current screen, select [Screen]/[[Properties] to set up on the [Auxiliary Keys] tab.

Please refer to

Section 2.5.8.4. [Auxiliary Keys] for the complete

details.

Note that this feature is only applicable on some models, please refer to Appendix A. - Table of the ADP 6.0 Features and HMI Models . For the connection, please refer to Appendix A. - External keys'

Connection (Network&Enhanced) .

The function of [Slide-out Menu] is to operate the functional keys conviently on HMI. (ex. [Set Button],[ Reset Button],[Momentary

Button]......etc.) In PWS6600 series, a user can define 5 functional keys.

When pressed [Menu] button, the HMI will display the slide-out menu with specified functional keys. See Figure 166.

Note that this feature is only applicable on some models, please refer to Appendix A. - Table of the ADP 6.0 Features and HMI models .

Besides, the number of the functional keys is depending on the

selected model.


2. Instructions

Figure 166. The [Slide-out Menu] Object

Select [Application]/[Slide-out Menu], its edit window will be as the following.

When pressed [New] button, the edit window will be as in Figure 167.


2. Instructions

Figure 167. Setup [Slide-out Menu]

• [Name]：Enter the name for slide-out menu.

• [Function] Block：

♦ [Select]：Press key to specify the functional key from the drop-down list.


2. Instructions

♦ [Cut],[Copy],[Replace],[Clear] ： To cut, copy, replace, and clear the button’s content.

• [Description] Block：Enter the name for the button in the

[Text] block.

• [View] Key：Press the key to view the designed menu as in

Figure 166.

[System Message] is to edit the message for HMI system. When the option [Operator Confirmation] is selected, executing the object will display its system message.For example, the system message “Are you

sure?” will display after the numeric entry. See Figure 168.


2. Instructions

Figure 168. An example of [System Message]

Select [Application]/[System Message], the edit window will be as

the following. See Figure 169.


2. Instructions

Figure 169. The [System Messages] Edit Window

Double-click on the message block; the message can be modified in its dialog box as the following.

Press [Select Default]; select the default file from the dialog box as the following.

Select [View Default] to view the content of defult message. Select

[Use Default] to use the specified default message. See Figure 170

(The default message is Chinese).

[Save as Default] button is to save the system messages as defalt file

(*.PSM).


2. Instructions

Figure 170. Update System Messages

[System Message] means the message from HMI system itself. The default message will be used in general usage. If the message need to be changed, please comply with the definition of default message.

2.9.7. [Report Format List]

This command is only applicable on SoftPanel; please refer to

SoftPanel for the complete details.

2.9.8. Macros

When select Macro command, the Macro edit window will display on

the screen. See Figure 171. Macro enables the Workstation to excute a

number of task including folw control, data transfer, conversion, counter, system service instructions, etc. Using Macro not only can communicate to the PLC but also connect to other device. This feature provides an efficient integration system as well as an economical structure in hardware application. Besides, Using Macro can also significantly save the program size and optimize the efficiency in PLC.

Please refer to Chapter 8. Macros.



2. Instructions

Figure 171. The Initial Macro Edit Window

When the first time the HMI run the application(It menas the first time to execute the application after power off ), this command is only executed once. The purpose of INITIAL Macro is data initialization and communication parameters declaration….etc.

When the HMI run the application, the command will be executed cyclically. The maximam 30 lines of Macro commands can be executed once. Whatever ths screen is, the Macro commands will be executed. The purpose of BACKGOUND Macro is communication control, Data conversion….etc.

When the HMI runs the application, the entire Macro will be executed once every 500ms. The purpose of CLOCK Macro is screen control, bit setting, command control, data transfer…etc.

2.9.9. [Compile]

The [Compile] button is used to test the application if any errors happen before the application is excuted. After the errors modified, then the application can be excuted.


2. Instructions

Select [Application]/[Compile], the dialog box as in Figure 172 will appear as the following. Note that Figure 172 an error found in the

application. After ADP 6.0 later, this function will provide detailed error message(s).

Figure 172. The [Compile Status] Dialog Box

After [OK] button pressed, its dialog box as in Figure 173 wil be on

the screen. A user can double-click on the error message, the object or macro screen will appear on the screen. Alternatively, a user can check

[Open dialog box automatically] box, then they will appear on the screen automatically.

Double-click, its screen will display.

Figure 173. The [Error Message] Dialog Box


2. Instructions

2.9.10. [Download Application] and [Download Fireware and

Application]

[Download Application] is used to download the update application and screen to HMI. See below.

[Download Fireware and Application] is to download the fireware and application to HMI, the first time download the application must select this application. See below.

If the model of the connected PWS unit is not the model required,

its message box will appear on the screen as the following. Besides, remember to excute [Compile] before download.

2.9.11. [File Protection]

[File Protection] is to protect the application; a user must enter the password to open the application file.


2. Instructions

Select [Application]/[File Protection], the dialog box will be as the following.

Note that this command is totally different from Section 2.9.1.5

[Password] Tab . This password is used to protect the application file

from modifying by those unathirized users. However, the password in

Section 2.9.1.5. [Password] Tab

is a security against copy and upload.


2. Instructions

2.10. Tool

[Tool] is to manage, simulate the application and edit recipe. There are four options : [Cross Reference],[Off-line Simulation],[On-line

Simulation] and [View/Edit Recipe].

2.10.1. Reference]

The [Cross Reference] helps a user to consult the Screen, Serial No.,

Address and Macro-in use quickly. See Figure 174.

In the [Cross Reference] window, select the icon to sort serial No., screen or address in numerical or alphabetical order. The right table will list its object and properties. The preview window below will display the selected object .Click on a heading of a column in the table

(ex. [Serial No.],[Name]….etc.) to sort the properties in ascending or

descending order. See Figure 174 .

Selected Object

Figure 174. The [Cross Reference] window


2. Instructions

•

•

Icons Introduction:

•

: Select this icon to sort by screen number.

: Select this icon to sort by name.

: Select this icon to sort by tag name.

Sort by Tag Name


2. Instructions

•

: Select this icon to sort by PLC address. The property is sort by address in ascending order; click the address to list the object.

Sort by address

•

: Select this icon to sort by Macro-in use Objects.

•

: Select this icon to sort by search pattern, this feature is only applicable on search PLC address or tag name.

•

: Set the desired pattern for search. Select [by PLC Addr] or [by Tag Name], [Exact match] or [Partical match] options to search. See Figure 175. If the search pattern is “W”, and select

[Partical match]. The cross refrence will display the objects

which PLC addresss has “W”- “W0”, “W1”, “W20”, “W60”.

See Figure 176.


2. Instructions

Figure 175. Specify the search pattern

Search Address

Figure 176. Display the search address

2.10.2. [Off-line Simulation] and [On-line Simulation]

ADP supports two types of simulation. One is [Off-line Simulation], the other is [On-line Simulation]. They both offer a user the simulation for HMI in the PC.

Note that the application must compile before simulation.


2. Instructions

[Off-line Simulation] is applicable on all PLCs which ADP offers but

[On-line Simulation] is only applicable on some PLCs.

By using [Offline Simulation], the result can be seen in the PC which is the same operation mode between HMI and PLC. For example,

PWS6300 Off-line Simulation will display its operation mode. See

Figure 177. PWS6600 Off-line Simulation will display its operation

mode as in Figure 178 and the externl keys will display as well. See

Figure 179.

Figure 177. PWS6300 Off-line Simulation


2. Instructions

Figure 178. PWS6600 Off-line Simulation

Figure 179. PWS6600 External Keys

This function is without communicating with PLC, the following are the convenience：

1. Before purchase, a user can simulate operation and recognize the HMI functions sufficiently.

2. Before download, a user can simulate in the PC to test the application including the screen change, buttons’ function and display….etc.

3. Before the completion of the PLC program, the HMI application can be present to the customer.


2. Instructions

ADP offers user [On-line Simulation] for the connection between PC and PLC communication ports. If there is only one RS232C serial port in PC, then user need to add another adapter for transferring the singnal from RS232C to RS422 or RS485 in order to connect with the

RS422 or RS485 port in PLC. Notice that the communication time between ADP and PLC is 60 mins. If you need to connect again, please close the ADP and restart it. If you want to remove this limitation, you need to install the licensed Software and a PLC adapter which has the function of RS-232C/422/485 and anit-noise (3000 volt).

For the development of the newest software, you may contact the nearby dealer or visite website http://www.hitechsite.com

to understand recently tendency.

Select [Tool]/[View/Edit Recipes], the recipe editor window will be as the following：

Note that the recipe must upload the file from HMI to PC and saved the file, the data size and total of recipe can not be modified. Note that this feature is only applicable on some models; please refer to

Appendix A. - Table of the ADP 6.0 Features and HMI Models.

For the setup steps, please refer to Section 2.9. [Application] and Chapter 3.

Recipe .

Select [File]/ [Open] to open the selected recipe file (ex. “painting.RCP”); See below. Note that the recipe file is *.RCP.


2. Instructions

Open the recipe files, then select [Recipe]/[Open Recipe]; its dialog box will be as the following and input the recipe number to the open recipe.

The recipe displays its number on the screen for a user to edit. See

Figure 180.


2. Instructions

Figure 180. Edit Recipe #1

The finction of recipe editor is the same as common edit tool; it includes open, save, print, view the recipe file and window arrangement. The following figure displays various formats to view the recipe data.



2. Instructions

2.11. Options

[Options] is offer a user options for edit and tansmission.

2.11.1. to

If a user selects [Snap to Grid] on the edit screen, the edit objects will

align (See Section 2.11.2. [Display Grid]

) the nearby grid. This command is convenient for a user to align objects.

If select this option, the edit screen will display the grid to align conveniently. See below.

Select this option; a user can specify the grid size in its dialog box as the following. The bigger grid size is, the longer the distance between point and point will be.


2. Instructions

Select [Options]/ [Transmission Setup], it dialog box will be as the

following. See Figure 181. A user can specify the download/upload

port and baud rate between PC and HMI. The PC port options are

“Ethernet”, “COM1”…. “COM16” and “USB”, “115200” baund rate is recommended.

Notice that the communication parameter setting is different from the

[Connection] tab’s setting in [Application]/[Workstation Setup] . The former is the setting between PC and HMI, the latter is the setting between HMI and PLC.

Figure 181. The [Transmission] Dialog Box

If [PC Port] is “Ethernet”, a user needs to input PC address or select from the drop-down list. See below.


2. Instructions

Select [Options]/[Language Selection], it will display three language options for the operation environment : They are English,Simpified

Chinese and Traditional Chinese.

Select the language to convert; the message box will be as the following. You should exit the application first to let the new language selection take effect. Do you want to the new language selection?


2. Instructions

2.11.6. [Default Screen Background Style]

Select [Options]/[Default Screen Background Style], the dialog box will be as the following. A user can specify the pattern, its color and background color for all screens. The default setting will display in all screens except for the screen with special edit.

2.11.7. [Default Frame Style]

Select [Options]/[Default Frame Style], its dialog box will be as the following on the screen. A user can specify the different object types with their own Shape/Frame. Then those objects will display with specified Shape/Frame on the screen.


2. Instructions

2.11.8. [Default Text Style]

Select [Options]/[Default Text Style], a user can specify Char Size,

Color, and Bkg. Color for each type of object. Those objects will display their setting on the screen.


2. Instructions

Select [Options]/[Numeric Keypad Setup], its dialog box will be as the following on the screen. A user can setup the numeric keypad on the screen. (ex. press [Numeric Entry] object to display the keypad.)

The keypad style as below：Small/Large; Symbols/Chinese Characters;

Left/Right.

Select [Options]/[Editing Options], the dialog box will be as the following on the screen. A user can setup the edit environment here.


2. Instructions

2.12. Window

There are [Cascode],[Tile],[Close All] options in [Window] menu and list all open screens.

[Tile] is used to copy and contrast with the screens.

[Close All] is to close all open sceens once; the screen will not be saved. The application is not closed.

Figure 182. [Cascode]


2. Instructions

Figure 183. [Tile]


2. Instructions

2.13. Help

[Help] offers users for the complete details and instruction about specific topics. There are [Macro],[Ladderplus] and [About] options in

[Help] menu.

2.13.1. [Macro]

Select [Help]/[Macro], the dialog box will be as the following. See

Figure 184. A user can consult macoro functions here.

Figure 184. Macros

2.13.2. [Ladderplus]

Select [Help]/[Ladderplus], the dialog box will be as the following. See

Figure 185. A user can consult the ladder reference for functions and

commands.


2. Instructions

Figure 185. Ladder Reference

2.13.3. [About]

Select [Help]/[About], check the version of ADP. See below.


2. Instructions


3. Recipe

3. Recipe

3.1. Recipe

Recipe is composed of a block of similiar systematic data. Because of the similarity, user can edit them as a group of receipe for sending conveniently. By using this way, user can send data efficiently and exactly. Recipe is not applicable on all models; please refer to

Appendix A. - Table of the ADP 6.0 Features and HMI Models for the complete details.

The following coating equipment is used to spray paint on different parts. The paint colors are limited to white, red, blue, dark and mixed color (1 = spray, 0 = no spray). One can use recipe to present and save the data with more simplification and convenience.

This recipe data has five variables: White, Red, Blue, Dark and

Time.

1 st

Recipe Part: Top, White, 3 min. ,

2 nd

Recipe Part: Button, Red, 2 min.,

3 rd

Recipe Part: Left, Purple, 1 min.,

4 th

Recipe Part: Right, Black, 1 min.,

A variable represents a word, the recipe size is 5 and the Number of recipe is 4.

This section will illustrate the operation and application of recipe.

Section 3.1 Coating Equipment will be took as example.


3. Recipe

1. First, a user needs to define Recipe Register. Select [Application]/ [Workstation Setup], and enter the PLC address, [Recipe size] and [Number of recipes] on the [Miscellaneous] tab. In this example, [Data size] = 5, [Number of recipes] = 4. See

Figure 186.

Figure 186. Setup [Recipe size] and [Number of recipes]

According to the above parameters setup, the starting address of PLC

Recipe Register is D100, size is 5Words. The starting address of PWS

Current Recipe is RCPW0, size is 5Words. The starting address of

PWS RAM is RCPW5, size is 5*4Words.

If the Recipe Write Flag is ON, the HMI will write Current Recipe from PWS RCPW0~RCPW4 to PLC D100~D104. If the Recipe Read

Flag is ON, the HMI write recipe from PLC D100~D104 to PWS

RCPW0~RCPW4. If user wants the HMI to read/write the recipe data from/to the PLC, one needs to define RNR (Dn+5).


3. Recipe

For the instructions of HMI recipe registers, please refer to the Section

4.3. Recipe Register .

2. Then, a user can edit its application and save as *.V6F. See

Figure 187. In the example, [Numeric Entry] object is used to

display the coating equipment data on HMI.

RCPW5~RCPW9 represents 1

RCPW10~RCPW14 represents 2 st nd

Top recipe data

Button recipe data

RCPW15~RCPW19 represents 3 rd

Left recipe data

RCPW20~RCPW24 represents 4 th

Right recipe data

Figure 187. The Screen of Coating Equipment

3. Download the ADP file to HMI. First, select [Download

Application] on HMI, then select [Application]/ [Download

Firmware and Application] in ADP. The dialog box will be appeared as below in ADP. See Figure 188.

Figure 188. Download Firmware and Application

4. Then upload the recipe from HMI to ADP. Select [Upload

Recipes] on HMI, then select [File]/[Upload Recipes] in ADP.


3. Recipe

The recipe will be uploaded to ADP and saved as *.RCP. See

Figure 189.

Figure 189. Save the Upload Recipe

5. After the above steps have completed, the recipe file can be open to edit. Select [Tool]/ [View/Edit], the ADP receipe edit dialog box should be appeared as Figure 190. Select [File]/

[Open] and select the desired recipe file (ex. “painting.RCP”).

Note: Recipe files “*.RCP” must be uploaded and saved in

HMI first, the recipe size and number of recipes can not be modified

Figure 190. The ADP Recipe Editor Dialog Box


3. Recipe

6. Select [Recipe]/[Open] to edit the recipe, enter the recipe number to open. See Figure 191. The examples of coating

equipment are [Recipe Number] =1~4.

Figure 191. Specify Recipe Number

7. Its dialog box should be appeared on the screen. See Figure 192.

A user can edit the data in the dialog box. Note that the count of

editable data is data size. After edit, select [File]/[Save] to save the data. For example, Recipe #1 is (1,0,0,0,3), Recipe #2 is

(0,1,0,0,2)…etc.


3. Recipe

Figure 192. Edit the Recipe Data

8. Select [Download Recipes] on HMI, then select [File]/

[Download Recipes] to download the recipe file. See Figure

193.Figure 193

Figure 193. Open Download Recipe


3. Recipe

9. Finally, select [Run] on HMI. The HMI will display the recipe filled with data as the screen displayed in ADP. The illustration of coating equipment includes painting methods and time. See

Figure 194.

Figure 194. The Recipe Data on HMI


3. Recipe

3.3. PLC Controls HMI Recipe

After the recipe is completed, a user can assign PLC to control the recipe through the communication between PLC and HMI. The PLC can read/write the recipe from/in HMI. This section will introduce the

PLC setup and corresponding execution related to HMI. For the introduction of communication between PLC and HMI, please refer to

Ch 4 Control and Status Block for the complete details.

The main steps to read recipe from PLC to HMI:

1. Set up continuous blocks, one is control block; the other is status block. Select [Application]/[Workstation Setup] in ADP, enter the PLC address and its size in [Control Block] and

[Status Block] on the [General] tab. The minimize size is 6

Words for recipe in [Control Block].

2. Take coating equipment as example, the control block of PLC

FX Series is D0-D5, size is 6; the status block is D10-D15. See

Figure 195. For the properties which are not explained in this

section, please refer to the Section

4.1. [Control Block] and the

Section 4.2. [Status Block] .

(Recipe Register is defined the same as the Section

3.2. Recipe

Operation Steps , the starting address is D100; Size is 5.


3. Recipe

Figure 195. Setup [Control Block] and [Status Block]

The following are Words and its name in PLC. The Words related to read/write recipe displays with light blue background. Please refer to the Chapter 4. Control and Status Block for the complete details.


3. Recipe

Control

Block

Status

Block

Recipe

Register

PLC Internal Data Block

Word Bit

15

D100

D101

D102

D103

D104

D0

D1

D2

D3

D4

D5

0 1 2

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

4 5 6

.

.

0 1 2

.

. . . . . .

D10

D11

D12

D13

D14

0 1 2

. . . . . .

4 5 6

D15

0 1 2

. . . . . .

.

.

.

. . . . . .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

1

.

.

.

0

0

0

3

13 14

. . . . . .

13 14

. . . . . .

13

13

14

14

15

15

15

• CFR bit#4 is Recipe Write Flag; bit#5 is RCPNo Change

Flag; bit#6 is Recipe Read Flag.

• GSR bit#4 is Recipe Write Status; bit#5 is RCPNo Change

Status; bit#6 is Recipe Read Status.

3. Setup RNR to read recipe#N. The PLC D5 is assigned to read recipe#N from HMI. For example, 1 st

recipe N = 1.

Member

SNR

CFR

LBCR#1

LBCR#2

LBCR#3

RNR

SSR

GSR

LBCR#1

LBCR#2

LBCR#3

RIR

1 st

Recipe,1 st

Word

1 st

Recipe, 2 nd

Word

1 st

Recipe, 3 rd

Word

1 st

Recipe, 4 th

Word

1 st

Recipe, 5 th

Word

4. Then set RCPNo Change Flag ON about 1sec. The HMI internal RCPNo and Current Recipe will be changed to read recipe#N. Remember to set RCPNo Change Flag OFF before re-trigger.


3. Recipe

♦ Status Block: When the value of RCPNO is changed, the value of RIR (D15) will be changed as well. And the current recipe#N can be checked from PLC. Besides, if the

RCPNo Change Flag sets ON, the GSR bit (D11 bit#5) will be set ON as well. The status bit will turn OFF automatically after the change of RCPNo.

For the steps of addressing recipe data, please refer to the Chapter

4. Addressing Recipe Data- For Enhanced HMI for the complete details.


3. Recipe

HMI Data Register

Member

RCPW0

RCPW1

RCPW2

RCPW3

1

0

0

0

RCPW4 3

RCPW5 1

RCPW6 0

.

.

0

0

RCPW9 3

RCPW10 0

RCPW11 1

. 0

. 0

RCPW14 2

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

Current Recipe

Recipe #1

Recipe #2

.

.

.

.

RCPW20 0

RCPW21 0

.

.

0

1

RCPW24 1

.

.

RCPNo

.

.

1

Recipe #4

.

.

Specified Recipe#N

.

.

.

.

.

.

5. Finally, set Recipe Write Flag ON; then the HMI will write the

Current Recipe in PLC. The recipe data will be saved in the designated Recipe Register Block. Remember to set the

Recipe Write Flag OFF before re-trigger. In this example, set

D1 bit#4 ON around 1 sec. Then the HMI will write the Current

Recipe in PLC D100-D104.


3. Recipe

♦ Status Block: When the HMI has written a recipe in, the

GSR bit (D11 bit#4) will be set ON automatically.

Simultaneously, if the Recipe Write Flag set OFF, the GSR bit will be set OFF as well.

After the above-mentioned steps have completed, the PLC can read one circle of a recipe from HMI. Remember to reset the flag OFF each time to trigger the flag.

Following the above-mentioned steps to set the RNR, RCPNo Change

Flag and Recipe Read Flag and read a recipe from PLC to HMI .


3. Recipe

3.4. The control of PLC recipe for HMI

The convenience of the HMI display can help user to control the PLC by the designed objects on HMI . The read or write action of the PLC receipe data can be controlled on HMI. Please refer to the Chapter 4.

Control and Status Block .

This section takes coating equipment as example to control the PLC recipe data. The following is an illustration of coating equipment on

HMI.

Figure 196. An Illustration of Coating Equipment on HMI


3. Recipe

Steps to Object Design:

1. Design an object for user to enter the recipe N and write the recipe N in PLC RNR.

In ADP, select [Object]/[Numeric Entry] and enter the address of

RNR in [Write] box. See below. Take the coating equipment as example, the address of RNR is D5; so the PLC recipe N will write in D5.

Figure 197. Setup the address to write recipe N in PLC RNR

2. Design an object which can confirm the designated recipe and write the commands to PLC CFR bit#5 RCPNo Change Flag; set the flag ON.

In ADP, select [Object]/[[Push Button]/[Set Constant]. First, enter the address of CFR in [Write] box. Then enter the constant value in

[Value] box to set its register bit. See below.

Take coating equipment as example, the address of CFR is D1.

RCPNo Change Flag is located in CFR bit#5. The constant is set

“32” (2

5

= 32), so the RCPNo Change Flag will be set ON.


3. Recipe

Figure 198. Set RCPNo Change Flag ON

3. Finally, design an object which can set CFR bit#4 Recipe Write

Flag ON and write the Current Recipe in PLC.

4. Take coating equipment as example, the address of CFR is D1.

The Recipe Write Flag is located in CFR bit#4, enter the value

“16” (2

4

= 16). Then the Recipe Write Flag located in D1 bit#4 will set ON. See below.


3. Recipe

Figure 199. Setup Recipe Write Flag ON

5. If a user wants to read a recipe from PLC to HMI, the Recipe

Read Flag located in CFR bit#6 must be set ON.

Take the coating equipment as example, the address of CFR is

D1.The Recipe Flag is located in CFR bit #6 (2 64). See below.


3. Recipe

Figure 200. Setup Recipe Read Flag ON

After the above-mentioned steps of object design has completed, a user

can execute the actions on HMI conveniently and directly. See Figure

200.


4. Control and Status Block


This chapter describes the general information that you need for programming your PLC to communicate with the Workstation. You can find detailed information for connecting specific PLCs’ to the Workstation.

To set up the Control Block Address, Size and Status Block Address, select [Application]/[Workstation Setup]. Enter the block address and size

in the appropriate box shown as in Figure 179.

Figure 179. Workstation Parameters Setup


301


Control Block is a block of contiguous registers in your PLC. The most important function in PWS is control block.

Control block enables the PLC to control actions on the Workstation through the PLC program. The minimum number of words used in the control block is 2. The maximum number of words used is 32 Words.

The size of the control block varies according to the functionality required (if recipe functionality is used, then the minimum length is 6

Words). The members of Control Block are shown in the following table:

Word# Member

Example:

S7-200

Example:

FX2

Dn Screen Number Register (SNR) VW0 D0

Dn+1 Command Flag Register (CFR) VW2 D1

Dn+2 Logging Buffer Control Register #1



VW4

VW6

VW8

D2

D3

D4

Dn+5 RCPNo Number Register (RNR) VW10 D5

Dn+6 and above

General User Area Register (GUAR)

User's application registers

CBn, n must not exceed 31.

VW12=cb6,

VW14=cb7,

...

VW18=cb9,

…

D6=cb6,

D7=cb7,

...

D9=cb9,

…

For example, if the starting address is D0 (the starting address can be specified, the member in the above table will shift according to the starting address); Size 10 represents the HMI can read data from

D0~D9 (10 words) PLC registers and stored them in CB0~CB9 internal control block.

The functions of word Dn through Dn+m (word n+m) in Control Block will be discussed in the following sections.

4.1.1. Screen Number Register

A PLC can request a Workstation to display a specific screen by setting its Screen Number Register (SNR) to the number of that screen.



SNR (Dn) enables PLC to control the HMI screen or print the screen.

For example, A PLC can request a Workstation to display a specific screen by setting its SNR as the number of that screen.

The HMI can not clear the SNR (Dn) to 0 automatically. But HMI clears the SNR (Dn) to zero before change a screen. If the screen specified by the SNR does not exist, then the HMI does nothing but clears the SNR

(Dn=0).

The value in SNR can be BCD or binary.


303


Example:

The value of data register SNR (Dn) and the functions (bit 0-bit 05) are as following:

Dn 16-Bit # (00-15)

Function

BIT 9-..BIT 0

The first 10bits will store the screen number to be changed to.

BIT 10

Reserve

Bit 13=off,12=off,11=off

Bit 13=off,12=off,11=on

Bit 13=off,12=on,11=off

Bit 13=off,12=on,11=on

Bit 13=on,12=off,11=off

Bit 13=on,12=off,11=on

No language was selected

Language1

Language 2

Language 3

Language 4

Language 5

Bit 13=on,12=on,11=off

Bit 13=on,12=on,11=on

Reserve

Reserve

Back light was turned off when set to 1

Bit 14

Bit 15

Back light was turned on when set to 1

The register (bit 0~9) to control the screen change and the other bits (bit

10~15) are not related. In other words, it is not necessary to control the back light or language when change the screen. Simultaneously, it is not necessary to assign to the screen number when set up the back light or select language.



The functions of the bits in CFR are summarized in the following table:

Dn+1 16-Bit#

(00-15)

Function

Bit

0

1

2

3

4

Alarm History Buffer Clear Flag

Alarm Frequency Buffer Clear Flag

Print Change Paper Flag/

Form

Feed Flag

Hardcopy Flag

Recipe Write Flag - Data send from PWS to PLC

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

RCPNO Change Flag

Recipe Read Flag - Data send from PLC to PWS

Buzzer action control

Clear Flag #1

Clear Flag #2

Clear Flag #3

Clear Flag #4

Trigger Flag #1

Trigger Flag #2

Trigger Flag #3

Trigger Flag #4

The bits of CFR (Dn+1) will be introduced in the following.

Bit 0: Alarm History Buffer Clear Flag

The function of this PLC bit is to clear the data of alarm history buffer.

If bit 1 represents to clear the data of alarm history buffer; the HMI will clear its data when bit 0 sets to bit1.

PLC require reseting the bit if HMI is re-assigned to clear the data and it needs enough time for HMI detection; or use the "handshake" function to reset the bit as well. For “handshake” function, please refer to

Section

4.2.2. General Status Register .

Bit 1: Alarm Frequency Buffer Clear Flag

The function of this PLC bit is to clear Alarm Frequency Buffer.

If bit 1 represents to clear the data of alarm frequency buffer, the HMI will clear its data when bit 0 sets to bit 1.

PLC requires reseting the bit if HMI is re-assigned to clear the data and it needs enough time for HMI detection; or use the "handshake" function


305


to reset the bit as well. For “handshake” function, please refer to

Section

4.2.2. General Status Register .

Bit 2: Print Change Paper Flag

The function of this PLC bit is to control the form feed of the printer connected with HMI.

Set the bit ON, the printer will change paper.

PLC requires reseting the bit if HMI is re-assigned to form feed and it needs enough time for HMI detection.

Bit 3: Hard Copy Flag

The function of this PLC bit is to control the hard copy of the printer connected with HMI.

Set the bit ON, the printer will print the current screen.

PLC requires reseting the bit if HMI is re-assigned to hard copy and it needs enough time for HMI detection.



Bit 4:

Recipe Write Flag - from PWS to PLC

The function of this bit is to write the recipe from RAM to PLC. It only supports the HMIs with recipe function.

Set the RNR (Dn+5) to write the recipe in, then set the bit ON, the recipe will be written in PLC.

PLC requires reseting the bit if HMI is re-assigned to write another recipe in and it needs enough time for HMI detection.

Bit 5: RCPNo Change Flag

The function of this PLC bit is to change the content value of RCPNo. RCPNo is an internal HMI register used to control the recipe data. It only supports the HMIs with recipe function.

Set the RNR (Dn+5) to write the recipe in, then set the bit ON, RCPNo can be modified.

PLC requires reseting the bit if HMI is re-assigned to modify RCPNo. and it needs enough time for HMI detection.


307


Bit 6: Recipe Read Flag - from PLC to PWS

The function of this PLC bit is to read the recipe data from PLC to HMI and save it in RAM block.

Set the RNR (Dn+5) as the recipe number to be updated. Then set the bit

ON, the HMI will update the corresponding recipe.

PLC requires reseting the bit if HMI is re-assigned to update and it needs enough time for HMI detection.

Bit 7: Buzzer Flag

The function of the PLC bit is to control HMI’s buzzer.

Set the bit ON (about 1 sec.) to start the buzzer.

PLC requires reseting the bit if HMI is re-assigned to start the buzzer.

Bit 8-11: Clear Flag #1-#4

The function of this PLC bit is to clear curves on HMI. There are four clear flags; a user can set up the corresponding signal to clear curves.

Set the bit ON/OFF once to clear the curves on trend graph or X-Y chart.

PLC requires reseting the bit if HMI is re-assigned to modify RCPNo. and it needs enough time for HMI detection.

Bit 12-15: Trigger Flag #1-#4

The function of this PLC bit is to sample the trend graph data,



there are four trigger flags in all.

Once set the PLC bit ON/OFF, HMI will read the continuous data and covert it into a continuous curve which is displayed by trend graph or X-

Y chart objects.

PLC requires reseting the bit if HMI is re-assigned to sample the data and it needs enough time for HMI detection.

4.1.3. Logging Buffer Control Registers: LBCRs

The other type of trend graphs in HMI is called the Historical Trend

Graph. The HMI reads the data form the corresponding logging buffer according to the specific signal. Logging buffer is used to save the sampling data in battery backup RAM. Remember to specify the logging buffer to read from and its size.

In LBCRs, Trigger Bits are used to request Logging Buffers to sample the data from PLC. Clear Bits are used to clear Logging Buffers and

Size Bits are used to determine the size of the data to be read. Therefore, user can use the LBCRs to clear Logging Buffers or to request the

Logging Buffers to sample the data from the PLC.

There are twelve logging buffers here; HMI can be specified to sample the data at fixed period automatically; sample or clear the historical trend graph controlled by PLC either.

For the setup of logging buffers; See Figure 180.


309


Figure 180. The Logging Buffer Setup

Note that LBCR1 controls Logging Buffer No. 1 through No. 4. LBCR2 controls Logging Buffer No. 5 through No. 8. LBCR3 controls Logging

Buffer No. 9 through No. 12.



The positions of the Trigger Bit, Clear Bit, and Size Bit for each

Logging Buffer are illustrated in the following table:

SB: Size Bit; CB: Clear Bit; TB: Trigger Bit

Trigger Bit #1--#12：Sampling Control

The HMI not only can sample the historical trend graph in time interval but also sample the historical trend graph controlled by the trigger bit of

PLC. Once trigger bit (TB#1—TB#12) sets ON/OFF (about 1 sec.), the

HMI will execute sampling. Remember to set OFF before re-trigger.

Clear Bit #1--#12：Clear Control

By triggering the trend graph clear bit (CB#1--CB#12) ON/OFF one time(about 1 sec), the trend graph can be erased. The flag need to set

OFF if need to trigger again.

Size Bit #1--#12：Multiple Sampling Control

By triggering the size bit (SB#--SB#12) ON, the HMI can sample one data, or multiple data. Once trigger bit (TB#1--TB#12) sets ON/OFF

(about 1 sec.), the HMI will execute sampling.


311


Logging Buffer:

If need to setup the logging buffer, the first step is to specify the [Source

Address] which is used to specify the PLC address to read the data from.

After the setup of [Source Address], the Size bit is OFF and the trigger bit is from 0 to 1. Then the logging buffer will read a data from the PLC.

To require logging buffer reading multiple data from PLC, a user set the

[Size] of [Source Address] to read from. Then set the Size bit ON and the Trigger bit from 0 to 1. Note that the length of size cannot exceed

1,022 Words.

Set the Clear bit from 0 to 1 to clear the logging buffer.

To require logging buffer recording, PLC must reset the Trigger and

Clear bit. It needs enough time for HMI detection

Example: FX2 PLC

Assumptions:

1. Control Block starts from D0 with the size of 6

2. Source Address of Logging Buffer #11 is D200

3. The record size of Logging Buffer#11 is 3 words

To request Logging Buffer #11 to read only one record of the data from the PLC, then first put the data to be read in D200-D202. Set the Size Bit

10 of D4 to be OFF and change the Trigger Bit 8 of D4 from 0 to 1. The

HMI reads D200-D202 for Logging Buffer #11 after it detects the

Trigger Bit 8 of LBCR3 changed from 0 to 1.

To request Logging Buffer #11 to read 50 records of the data from PLC, set D200 to be 150(=50x3). Put the data to be read in D201-D350. Set the Size Bit 10 of D4 to be ON and change the Trigger Bit 8 of D4 from

0 to 1. The HMI reads D200-D202 first to get the real size of the data to be read after it detects the Trigger Bit 8 of LBCR3 changed from 0 to 1.

Then the HMI reads D200-D350 and stores in battery backup RAM.

To request Logging Buffer #11 to clear records, then change the clear bit of D4 from 0 to 1.

4.1.4. RCPNo Number Register : RNR

RCPNO is an internal register of the HMI that specifies the current recipe number. To change the RCPNO, the PLC first sets the RNR to the



number of the recipe and then turns on the RCPNO Write Flag or Recipe

Read Flag.

To change RCPNO by PLC, the PLC has to set RNR to the number of recipe and turn on the RCPNO Change Flag which is CFR 5 bit. If the

RNR is zero or greater than the maximum recipe number, then the HMI would ignore the request.

To request HMI to change RCPNO, the PLC must reset the RCPNO

Change Flag, or use the RCPNO Change Status which is GSR 5 bit

Therefore, be sure to set this flag with enough time so the HMI is able to detect it.

4.1.5. General User Area Register

For high-speed display, the HMI reads the data from internal register only (cannot write in) when edit in ADP. (The maximum size is 32; the size relied on the length of control block) The format is shown in the following table:

Format

Description

CB n

CBn b n represents the Words data of the nth register , n is decimal number; n

≥ 0 but smaller than the specified size. n.b represents the bit data correspondent with nth word register, b is hexadecimal nth b = 0-f.

For example, if the address of the Control Block is D0, then user can select [Object], [Numeric Display] to display the Recipe Number Register by configuring it to display CB5 instead of displaying D5.

The internal buffer for the Control Block is read only. This means that, for example, one can configure a Numeric Display object to show the value of CB2, but you cannot configure the object to allow the operator to change the value of CB2.

For example, if user wants to achieve the effect of the RNR numeric display object by using ADP. He can specified D5 to read from

(writeable) or CB5 to read from(unwriteable).

4.1.6. Determine the Size of Control Block

As every application needs a Screen Number Register (SNR) and a

Control Flag Register (CFR), User can refer to the following rules to determine the size of Control Block:

1. If the HMI reads/writes a recipe from/to a PLC, then the minimum size is six.


313


2. If Item 1. is not true and the HMI uses LBCR3 to control

Logging Buffer #9-12, then the minimum size is five.

3. If either Item 1. or Item 2. is not true and the Workstation uses

LBCR2 to control Logging Buffer #5-8, then the minimum size is four.

4. If none of Item 1. through Item 3. is true and the Workstation uses

LBCR1 to control Logging Buffer #1-4, then the minimum size is three.

5. If none of the above is true, then the minimum size is two.

6. The size of Control Block is the minimum size plus the size of the user area.



Status Block is a block of contiguous registers in your PLC that display status information from the Workstation. For example, you can get the current screen number from the first word of the Status Block. The constituents of Status Block are shown in the following table:

Word# Member

Example:

S7-200

Example:

FX2

Dm Screen Status Register (SSR) VW20 D10

Dm+1 General Status Register (GSR)

Dm+2

Dm+3

Dm+4

Logging Buffer Status Register #1

(LBSR1)


(LBSR2)


(LBSR3)

Dm+5 RCPNo Image Register (RIR)

VW22 D11

VW24 D12

VW26 D13

VW28 D14

VW30 D15

Dm+6 PWS700X Key Image Register VW32 D16

For example, if the status block is D10 and the size is 6 Words; the HMI will write the status data of current screen in D10~D15. The size of

Status Block is six words (seven words for 700X). Some words are not needed in application.

When a screen is changed on the HMI, the PLC sets its Screen Status

Register (SSR) to the number of new screen. Therefore, the PLC can identify the current screen by reading the SSR.

The value of SSR can be in BCD or binary format.


315


4.2.2. General Status Register

The components of the General Status Register (GSR) are shown in the following (bit 0- bit 15):

D11 16-Bit

# (00-15)

Member

Bit 0

Bit

1

0

Password Level Status (not available for applications configured to monitor alarms)

Password Level Status (not available for applications configured to monitor alarms)

Alarm History Buffer Clear Status

1

Alarm Frequency Buffer Clear Status

Form Feed Status

Hardcopy Status

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Recipe Write Status

RCPNO Change Status

Recipe Read Status

Battery Status

Clear Status Flag #1




Trigger Status Flag #1






Bit 0, 1: Password Level Status - (not available for applications configured to monitor alarms)

Once connected with HMI, the password level status bit 0 ~ bit 3 represent the current user level.

Level 0 ==>Bit 0 = off, Bit 1 = off

Level 1 ==>Bit 0 = on, Bit 1 = off

Level 2 ==>Bit 0 = off, Bit1 = on

Level 3 ==>Bit 0 = on, Bit1 = on

Level 4 ~ 9 ==>Bit 0 = on, Bit 1 = on

Bit 0: Alarm History Buffer Clear Status

The HMI will turn ON this status bit when it detects the Alarm History

Buffer Clear Flag being turned ON. When the HMI finishes clearing the

Alarm History Buffer, it will turn OFF this status bit.

Bit 1: Alarm Frequency Buffer Clear Status

The HMI will turn ON this status bit when it detects the Alarm Frequency Buffer Clear Flag being turned ON. When the Workstation finishes clearing the Alarm Frequency Buffer, it will turn OFF this status bit.

Bit 2: Form Feed Status

The HMI will turn ON this status bit when it detects the Form Feed Flag being turned ON. When the HMI finishes sending the Form Feed character to a printer, it will turn OFF this status bit.

Bit 3: Hardcopy Status

The HMI will turns ON this status bit when it detects the Hardcopy Flag being turned ON. When the Workstation finishes printing the current screen, it will turn OFF this status bit.

Bit 4: Recipe Write Status

The HMI will turns ON this status bit when it finishes sending a recipe from RAM block of HMI to PLC. The HMI will turn OFF this status bit as it detects the Recipe Write Flag being turned OFF. One can use this bit as a handshake signal to switch the Recipe Write Flag.

Note that this function only supports the HMI with recipe function.


317


Bit 5: RCPNo Change Status

The HMI will turns ON this status bit when it detects the RCPNO

Change Flag being turned ON. When the Workstation finishes changing the RCPNO, it will turn OFF this status bit.

Bit 6: Recipe Read Status

The Workstation will turns ON this status bit when it finishes reading a recipe from PLC. The Workstation will turn OFF this status bit as it detects the Recipe Read Flag being turned OFF. One can use this bit as a handshake signal to switch the Recipe Read Flag.

Note that this function only supports the HMI with recipe function.

Bit 7: Battery Status

The HMI will turn ON the Battery Status if it detects battery low before running an application.

Bit 8-11: Clear Status Flag #1-#4

The HMI will turn ON one of the Clear Status Bits when it finishes the clearing task requested by the corresponding Clear Flag controlled by

PLC. The HMI will turn OFF the same status bit as it detects the corresponding Clear Flag being turned OFF. One can use Clear Status

Bits as handshake signals to switch the Clear Flags.

Bit 12-15: Trigger Status Flag #1-#4

The HMI will turn ON one of the Trigger Status Bits when it finishes the task triggered by the corresponding Trigger Flag. The HMI will turn

OFF the same status bit as it detects the corresponding Trigger Flag being turned OFF. One can use Trigger Status Bits as handshake signals to switch the Trigger Flags.



4.2.3. Logging Buffer Status Registers (LBSRs)

LBSR1 saves the status of Logging Buffer No. 1 through No. 4. LBSR2 saves the status of Logging Buffer No. 5 through No. 8. LBSR3 saves the status of Logging Buffer No. 9 through No. 12.

The status bit’s position for each of the Logging Buffers is illustrated in the following:

AB: Almost Full Bit indicates the buffer is 90% or more full.

FB: Full Bit indicates the buffer is full.

CB: Clear Status Bit indicates the clear command was received.

TB: Trigger Status Bit indicates the trigger command was received.

The HMI will turn ON one of the Trigger Status Bits when it finishes collecting one record of the data for the Logging Buffer. The Workstation will turn OFF the same status bit as it detects the corresponding

Trigger Flag being turned OFF. User can use the Trigger Status Bits as handshake signals to switch the Trigger Flag.

4.2.4. RCPNo Image Register

The HMI sets the RCPNO Image Register (RIR) to the new value of

RCPNO as this internal register is changed by user or PLC. Therefore, the PLC is able to identify the current value of RCPNO. The HMI reports the value of RCPNO to the PLC by writing the value to the

RCPNO Image Register. RCPNO Image Register is Word #5 of the

Status Block and one can keep track of the current recipe by this register.


319


Recipe Register

Recipe block is located in PLC register. If user wants the HMI to read/write the recipe data from/to the PLC, one needs to define a Recipe

Block of the application. Please refer to Chapter 3. Recipe for the complete details.

The maximum recipe memory block is 524,288 16-bit (word) for the

HMI with recipe function. For the applied HMI models, please refer to

Appendix A for the complete details.

In the application of HMI, the ADP provides internal recipe register number for use; the format is shown in the following:

Format

Description

RCPNo

Recipe Register Number

(1~N)

RCPNO is an internal register of the Workstation that specifies the current recipe number; No

≥1.

RCPWnnnnn

Recipe Register

#nnnnn is current recipe where nnnnn is a decimal number and n

≥0.

RCPWnnnnn.b

Recipe Register Bit nnnnn is decimal number, n

≥0; b is hexadecimal number, b=0-F

RCPNO is an internal register of HMI used to display the specified recipe on the screen. Therefore, the HMI changes the RCPNO number to display its corresponding recipe data.

There are two methods to change RCPNO number:

One way is a user can change RCPNO number through the numeric entry object directly.

The other way is the PLC changes RCPNO constant. To change RCPNO constant, a user must write the specified number N to RCPNO Number

Register Dn+5; then set the RCPNO Change Flag Dn+1 bit 5 as

ON(about 1 sec.). The HMI will change RCPNO constant to N and display the recipe data RCPW0~RCPWm correspondent with the Nth recipe.



4.2.6. Addressing Recipe Data – For enhanced HMI

Suppose that the number of recipe N=20, a recipe size m=100 Words.

To edit an addresss, one need to setup the current recipe N =RCPNO, the HMI will display the corresponding recipe data

1. Enter the recipe number N to RCPNO or change RCPNO by

PLC. The HMI will display the corresponding recipe data.

For example, if RCONO N=5, RCPW0~RCPW99 displays the data correspondent with 5 th

recipe; if RCPNO N=7, RCPW0~RCPW99 displays the data correspondent with 7 th

recipe.

2. Another way to edit the corresponding data of recipe register is

absolute address.

Suppose that an address is greater than RCPW100, the corresponding recipe address will display the Nth recipe data.

RCPW100~RCPW199 represents 1st recipe data.

RCPW200~RCPW299 represents 2nd recipe data.

、

、

RCPW2000~RCPW2099 represents 20 th

recipe data.

When the address greater than RCPW2099 is invalid.

So the RCP234 represents 2 nd

RCPNO =2.

recipe data, 35 th

words and RPCW 34 in


321


4.3.1. Time Block – The HMI writes to PLC

If user wants the HMI to write the current time and date to the PLC, then one needs to define the Time Block for the application. Time Block is a block of three words in the PLC and its format is BCD. The HMI updates the Time Block every minute with the time data. The format of time block is shown in the following:

Low byte of word 0

(07-00)

High byte of word 0

(15-08)

Low byte of word 1

(07-00)

High byte of word 1

(15-08)

Low byte of word 2

(07-00)

Minute BCD 00-59

Hour BCD 00-23

Day BCD 00-31

Month BCD 01-12

00-99

High byte of word 2

(15-08)

Day-of-week

1 = Sunday

2 = Monday

3 = Tuesday

4 = Wednesday

5 = Thursday

6 = Friday

7 = Saturday

The steps to set up the time block are shown in the following. Select

[Application]/[Workstation Setup] in ADP, then a user can set up time

block on the [Miscellaneous] tab. See Figure 181. The starting address is

D240 and the size is 3 Words, so the data will save in D240, D241 and

D242 16-bit registers. The HMI updates the Time Block every minute with the time data.



Time Block

Figure 181. Setup Time Block

4.3.2. Time Block – PLC writes to HMI

The HMI can read time and date from the internal Real Time Clock of

PLC. Then the HMI can modify the corresponding data for the time/date/week read from the RTC and display the content on HMI.

The HMI updates the Time Block every minute with the time data. See

Figure 182

Figure 182. Setup Time/Date/Week on the HMI


323


The HMI does the following steps to accomplish one read cycle and it will repeat these steps continuously. User needs to know this read cycle to configure a HMI so as to communicate with the PLC efficiently.

Steps of the cycle:

1. Reads control block of PLC.

2. Reads specified register blocks for the current screen.

3. Reads specified On/Off blocks for the current screen.

4. Reads specified the Alarm Register regularly (3-10 sec.).

5. Reads a number of PLC locations which: (1) are shown on the current screen; (2) do not appear in the current screen’s register blocks or On/Off Blocks and have not been read recently.

The number of PLC locations to be read in this step is specified by the "number of individual reads per read cycle" of the current screen.

This read cycle is repeated continuously from Step 1. to Step 5.


5. Multi-link: Normal Connection Port


The multi-link provides users an economical and convenient way to link several HMIs and communicate with a single PLC connection port.

User needs one master HMI and others are slaves. The master is the only HMI that is physically connected to a PLC and this HMI is responsible for the exchange of the data between the PLC and the slaves. Each of the slaves HMI must be assigned to an unique address so that the master HMI is able to identify which slave to send the data to.

The following picture shows the setup for four HMIs with one PLC.

Note that the RS-485 cable must be used for the connection between the master and the slaves and each of the slaves must be assigned to an unique address.

The cable and the connection between the master and the PLC is the same as the normal 1-to-1 application. The RS-485 cable must be used for the connection between the master and the slaves. Additionally, each of the slaves must be assigned to an unique address. This multi- link function is only supported by version ADP 3.0 or later. Besides, all the PLC models in ADP 6.0 support this function.

Moreover, Multi-link can be connected through Ethernet. For the communication and application of Ethernet, please refer to Chapter 6.


332

ADP User’s Manual


The steps to set up communication parameters are shown in the following:

2. For setting up the Master - the HMI communicates with

PLC：

(i) Select [Application]/[Workstation Setup], check the [This

PWS is a multi-link master] box. Next enter the addresses and sizes in the [Common Register Block], [Common On/Off

Block], [CRB Size] and [COB Size] box. See Figure 206.

For the function of CRB and COB, please refer to next chapter for the complete details.

(ii) Download the edited application to the master HMI.

Figure 206. Set up the Parameters for the Master HMI


333


3. For setting up the Slave - the HMIs do not communicate with

PLC:

(i) Select [Application]/[Workstation Setup]. On the [Connection] tab, select [COM1] port used for the connection and enter the addresses and sizes in the [Common Register Block],

[Common On/Off Block], [CRB Size] and [COB Size] box.

See Figure 207.

Note that the CRB, COB, data format, starting address and data size must be the same between master HMI and slave

HMIs.

(ii) Setup [Default Address]

：

If the slave HMI dip switch#5 set OFF, the HMI will read the communication parameters from ADP. A user must enter the

unique address (2-10) in [Default Address]. See Figure 207.

Remember to compile and download applications each time after making any changes to the address.

If the slave HMI dip switch#5 set ON, the HMI will read the parameters from hardware. A user must set up the address (1-

15) in Workstation Node Address.

(iii) Download the edited application to the slave HMIs.

334



Figure 207. Set up the Parameters for the Slave HMIs

Please note that the address number of master HMI will not affect the communication with the slave HMI. Besides, it is not necessary to set up the baud rate or data type for the slave HMI. The point to set up the slave HMI is to make sure the connect port with the master HMI.


335


In ADP, it allows you to specify Common Register Block (CRB) and

Common On/Off Block (COB) for HMIs. CRB is a block of registers and COB is a block of On/Off locations in PLC. In every read cycle, the master Workstation reads the data from both CRB and COB. Then the master sends the data of the CRB and COB to all the slaves.

CRB and COB allow a user to set the maximum size up to 128 words and 256 words. In multi-link, user has to specify the CRB and COB with the same size and format for each of the HMIs. Hence, the slaves are not requested to read the data from CRB or COB directly. The slaves read the data from the buffer where the data sent by the master are saved. CRB and COB play an important role in terms of communication efficiency since they can reduce the traffic in the multi-link as well as the link between the master and the PLC

For instance, arranging Control Blocks of the HMI in CRB and COB is one of the most effective ways to improve the performance. Arranging the variables which are common to some of the Workstations in CRB or COB will also improve the performance. In doing so, one will be able to see a high refresh rate for the variables arranged in CRB and

COB since the variables are refreshed in every read cycle.

In addition to CRB and COB, remember to make use of the register blocks and on/off blocks for screens since this will lessen the burden of the HMI by reducing the number of read commands.

Note that one is advised to specify CRB and COB with contiguous locations as designing a screen.

336



When used the Multi-link, please note the following points:

1. The RS-485 connection method is suggested for the multi- link. And the RS232 connection method is suggested for only one slave HMI.

2. Each slave must have its unique address.

3. The HMIs on the same multi-link must have the same CRB and COB.

4. The master HMI should only start after all the slaves have displayed their first screens. To delay the start-up of the master, select the [Miscellaneous] tab in the [Application

Properties] dialog box. Then set the time from the [Start Up

Delay (Sec.)] list. See below.


337


338


6. Ethernet Communication and Application


To keep up with the rapid growth of technology, network communication is commonly applied to data collection, analysis, and remote supervisory and control in industry. HITECH has developed Ethernetenabled HMI which can provide application upload/download over

Ethernet, communication to other Ethernet-enabled PLCs and HMIs.

Note that this newly developed Ethernet-enabled HMI must also work with the Ethernet-enabled PLCs or HMIs. Also, one must also use

ADP 6.0 or later to support these new features.

The following will introduce the communication setup, application upload/download, communication to Ethernet-enabled PLCs and HMIs related to Ethernet. There are two methods for Ethernet-enabled HMI to communicate with multi-HMI/PLC over Ethernet; one is Multi-link and the other is Cross-link. Besides, the SoftPanel can read or control the PLC over Ethernet.

Note that this feature is only applied in some models; please refer to

Appendix A. - Table of the ADP 6.0 Features and the HMI models .

ADP User’s Manual 339


6.1. Link

There are two methods to set up the link. One can use RJ45 Straight

Through Cable to set up the link, shown in 錯誤! 找不到參照來源。.

Another way is to use RJ45 Crossover Cable to set up the link. See 錯

誤

! 找不到參照來源。. The RJ45 Crossover Cable requires HUB for

connection.

Figure 207. RJ45 Straight Through Cable

Figure 208. RJ45 Crossover Cable

The choice between these two methods depends on one’s needs and available equipment. Users can refer to the following table for the differences between these two methods.

340



RJ45

CrossOver Cable

No HUB; link to HMI directly

1-to-1 only

RJ45

Straight Through Cable

HUB required

Multiple link



6.2. IP Address Setup

To read or send data from HMI over the Ethernet, user needs to set up the correct IP address.

A user can set up IP address in [Configure] of HMI system menu. The following figure is [Configuration Table] of network PWS3261.

1. If you upload/download over the Ethernet, please note that the first three segment of PC

IP address must be the same as the first three segment of HMI IP address. For example, IP address of PC — 100.101.102.010 and IP address of HMI — 100.101.102.XXX. Please ask your MIS staff if there is any question.

2. Please note that the IP address of HMI should not be shared with others in the network.

342



6.3. Application Upload/Download over Ethernet

The Ethernet-enabled HMI with ADP 6.0 version or later offers user upload/download for application, firmware, recipes and source code.

See Figure 209.

Figure 209.

Ethernet

An Example of Upload/Download over the

The steps to upload/download an ADP application over Ethernet:

1. First, set up IP address, Gateway address…etc in [Configura-

tion Table]. Please refer to

Section 6.2. IP address for com-

plete details.

2. In ADP 6.0, select [Options]/[Transmission Setup] and select

“Ethernet” from the [PC Port] list. See Figure 210.

Figure 210. [Transmission Setup]`

3. Enter the address to [IP Address] or select from the drop-down list. See Figure 211.



Figure 211. The [Transmission Setup] Dialog

Box

4. Select [Application]/[Download Application] or [Download

Firmware and Application] to download the application.

Follow the same steps, a user can use [Upload Application],[Upload

Recipes],[Download Recipes],[Reconstruct Source] over Ethernet. For

[Upload Application], the above-mention steps must be changed to select [File]/[Upload Application].

If the link is not set up properly, then ADP will show the error message.

See below.

344



6.4. Communication to Ethernet-enabled PLCs

ADP 6.0 supports the HMI to communicate with Ethernet-enabled

PLCs on Modbus TCP/IP. Therefore, the HMI can control or read the data from PLC. See below.

Figure 212.

Steps to follow：

Connection to Ethernet-enabled PLCs

1. Select [Application]/[Workstation Setup], the [Application

Properties] dialog box is displayed. On the [General] tab, select the type of PLC or Modbus TCP/IP from the [Controller/PLC] list. See below.



2. Select the [Connection] tab. On the [Connection] tab, select

“Ethernet” from the [Port/method used for the connection] list.

Key in the address in the [Default Address] and [IP Address] box. See below.錯誤! 找不到參照來源。

346



3. Download the ADP application file to the HMI and set up the link to connect.



6.5. Multi-link (One Master and Multiple Slaves)

In ADP 6.0, the Multi-Link over Ethernet function allows user to link several HMIs (one master and multiple slaves) and speeds up the communication between the HMIs.

Figure 213.

Steps to follow：

Multi-Link over Ethernet Function

1. Setup the Master – HMI linked to PLC：

(i) Select [Application]/[Workstation Setup]. One the [General] tab, select the model of HMI from the

[Panel/Workstation] list and the type of PLC from the

[Controller/PLC] list. See below.

348



(ii) Select the [Connection] tab. On the [Connection] tab, check the [Multi-link] box. Then select “Ethernet” from the [Master Port] list. Also, key in the block and address in the [Common Register Block], [CRB Size], [Common

On/Off Block] and [COB Size] box. See 錯誤! 找不到參

照來源。

. Setup the Multi-link on the [Connection] tab.

See below.

• Check the [This PWS is a multi-link master] box.

• Select “Ethernet” from the [Master Port] list.

• Key in the address and its size in the [Common Register Block],[CRB Size],[Common On/Off Block] and

[COB Size] box.



2. Download the ADP application to the Slave HMI.

3. Set up Slave – HMI not linked to PLC

(i) Select [Application]/[Workstation Setup]. On the

[Connection] tab, select “Ethernet (Multi-link slave)” from the [Port/method used for the connection] list.

(ii) Set up [Master IP Address],[Common Register

Block],[CRB Size],[Common On/Off Block] and [COB

Size].

350



4. Download the ADP application to the Slave HMI with linked

PLC.



6.6. Cross-link over Ethernet Function (share the data)

In ADP 6.0, the Cross-Link over Ethernet function allows user to link several HMIs and PLCs and share the data between these HMIs and

PLCs. See Figure 214.

Figure 214. Cross-link Function

Use PWS3261N as an example in the following steps：

1. Setup PWS3261N_A：

(i) First, select [Application]/[Workstation Setup]. On the

[General] tab, select the model of HMI from the

[Panel/Workstation] list and the type of PLC from the

[Controller/PLC] list. See Figure 215.

352



Figure 215. Set up PWS3261N_A

(ii) To set up Cross-link on the [Connection] tab; See Figure

216.

• Click [Add] to add Connection 2 for Cross-link.

• Select “Ethernet (Cross-link)” from the [Port/method used for the connection] list.

• Key in [Default Address],[IP Address] and [PWS

Type] for the desired device.



Figure 216. Add Cross-link Device

Note that Connection 1 linked to the PLC by Com Port and Connection

2 linked to the PLC by Cross-Link Ethernet.

(iii )If PWS3261N_A access the data from the PLC linked to

PWS3261N_B, follow these steps:

• PLC register address setup：

Example: Specify the address of PLC register [2/C0] for

Siemens S7-200.

Note：PLC register [2/C0] refers to Connection No. 2 on

the [Connection] tab. See Figure 216. [/] means the

separation from register address.

There are two ways to setup：

354



(a) Double-click on the object. Select the [Attributes] tab. In

the [Variable] block, key in the location “2/Q0.0”. See 錯

誤

! 找不到參照來源。.

(b) Key in the address of PLC register in the object attributes dialog box. Here the address is “2/C0” , See below; or

(c) Press

， the [Address/Constant Input] dialog box will be on the screen. See below.

Select “2-Connection 2” from the [Connection] list.

Key in the address in the [Device Type] and

[Add./Value] box. Here the address is C0.

Press [OK], “2/C0” will display in the object attribute dialog box.



2. Download the edited application from PWS3261N_A to

PWS3261N_A.

3. Setup PWS3261N_B：

The setup steps are the same as PWS3261N_A, but the PLC device

Connection 1 of PWS3261N_B is the PLC device Connection 2 of

PWS3261N_A . See below.

Note that the [Add./Value] of the PLC device Connection 2 must be changed.

The steps are similar to those for PWS3261N_A.

356



4. Download the ADP application file of PWS3261N_B to

PWS3261N_A. Connect the link to PLCs and network.



1.

Note that there are two types of driver for Cross-Link: Dedicated driver and Shared driver.

2.

One HMI can only have 3 types of driver, including COM1,

COM2 and Ethernet (Dedicated driver). Therefore, one HMI can only have one Ethernet (Dedicated driver).

3.

Use Ethernet (Shared driver) when 3 or more connections are needed.

4.

Ethernet (Dedicated driver) is more efficient than Ethernet

(Shared driver).

5.

Ethernet (Shared driver) is up to 16.

6. Since UDP is used in Cross-Link, Cross-Link is only adoptable to local LAN.

358



SoftPanel

ADP 6.0 or later supports Ethernet-enabled HMI models (ex.

PWS3261 Network model), Ethernet-enabled PLCs or PLCs which are

connected to HMI over Ethernet. See Figure 217.

Figure 217. Control over Ethernet by SoftPanel software

For SoftPanel directly linked to PLCs, follow the steps as in

Section

6.4. Communication to Ethernet-enabled PLCs .

To access the PLCs via the Ethernet-enabled HMIs (ex. PWS3261

Network model), follow these steps:

1. Select [Application]/[Workstation Setup]. On the [General] tab, select SoftPanel from the [Panel/Workstation] list. See Figure

218 .

2. Select the type of PLC from the [Controller/PLC] list. See

Figure 218.



Figure 218. Select “SoftPanel” and the Type of PLC

3. Select the [Connection] tab. On the [Connection] tab, select

“Ethernet (Cross-link)” from the [Port/method used for the connection] list. Then key in the default and IP address in the

[Default Address] and [IP Address] box and select the [PWS

Type]. See Figure 219.

4. Select type of HMI from the [PWS Type] list. See Figure 219.

5. Run the SoftPanel application and link with PLC.

360



Figure 219. Key in the Address and Select PWS Type


7. Multi-Channel Communication

Since there are many different vendors and models of all kinds of equipments on the market, users often have a difficult time in data collection and integration. To solve this problem, HITECH develops a

HMI model with 2 COM Ports and Ethernet to connect PLCs or other equipments (ex. temperature controller, server, inverter…etc) from different vendors so they are able to integrate and collect the data on

HMI or PC.

Note that this feature is applicable on all HMI models; please refer to Appendix A. - Table of the ADP 6.0 Features and HMI Models .

362



7.1. Connection

User can use COM1, COM2 or Ethernet Port to link the Multi-Chan-

nel Connection.

One can use RS232, RS422 or RS485 to set up the link, but the method of connection is based on the needs and available equipments. For

Ethernet, one has to use RJ45 to set up the link. Also the PLC must be

Ethernet-enabled. See Figure 228. For the method of connection and

setup, please refer to Chapter 9. Communication between PLC& PWS .

Figure 228. Multi-Channel Connection


363


Multi-Channel connection setup includes the types of PLC and its parameters.

Follow the steps to set up:

1. In ADP, select [File]/[New]. The [New Application’s Properties] dialog box is displayed. On the [General] tab, select the type of the first PLC from the [Controller/PLC] list, for example, “Mitsubishi FX Series.” See Figure 229.

Figure 229. Select the Type of the First PLC

2. Select the [Connection] tab. On the [Connection] tab, select the method of connection for the first PLC from the [Port/method used for the connection] list. Next enter the addresses in the

PWS’s [Address] and PLC’s [Default Address] box. Then make the selection from the [Baud Rate], [Data Bits], [Parity]

364



and [Stop Bits] list. See 錯誤! 找不到參照來源。. User can

refer to Chapter 7 in the ADP User’s Manual for details.

3. Then select the [Connection] tab, and set up the parameters for the first linked PLC including default address, baud rate, data bits, parity, stop bits…etc. See Figure 230. Please refer to

Chapter 9. Communication between PLC & PWS

.

Figure 230. Setup the Connection with the first PLC

Note that if SW5 = ON, the parameters of the first linked PLC must be set up according to the Configuration Table in System Menu; If

SW5 = OFF, the parameters of the first linked PLC must be set up according to the [Connection] tab in [Application]/[Workstation Setup].

See Figure 230.

4. To add a second PLC, click [Add] on the [Connection] tab, for example, “Simatic S7-200 [via PPI; 1-to-1].” See Figure 231 .


365


Figure 231. Add a second linked PLC

5. Follow the steps in 2. to set up the second PLC. Enter the addresses in the PWS’s [Address] and PLC’s [Default Address] box. Make the selection from the [Baud Rate], [Data Bits],

[Parity] and [Stop Bits] list. See Figure 232. User can refer to

Chapter 9.

in the ADP User’s Manual for details.

Figure 232. Set up the Connection with the second PLC

For the second PLC, one has to set up the parameters according to the

[Connection] tab in [Application]/[Workstation Setup]. See Figure 230.

366



6. If the communication port is being used already, then the following error message will show up. See Figure 233.

Figure 233. The Port is being Used Already

7. Next, to add an Ethernet-enabled PLC, click [Add] to add a

third PLC, for example, “ModBus TCP/IP Device.” See Figure

234.

Figure 234. Add the third Ethernet-enabled PLC

8. To set up the third PLC (Ethernet-enabled), enter the address in [Default Address] and [IP Address] box. See Figure 235 錯

誤

! 找不到參照來源。. User can refer to

Chapter 9 in the

ADP User’s Manual for details.


367


Figure 235. Set up the Connection with the third Ethernet-enabled PLC

9. Click [OK] to finish the setup. If user would like to change the setup later on, simply select [Application]/[Workstation Setup].

368



Note:

• [Add]： To add a new connection device. Here is to add another PLC.

• [Remove]： To delete a connection device. This function is not applicable to the first connection (i.e. Connection 1).

• [Rename]： To change the Device Name or the Device Type.

For Connection 1, user is only able to change its Device Name.

To change its Device Type, one has to change it from the [General] tab.

• [No.] column： Numbered by the order of addition of a device and it is not changeable.


369


7.3. Read/Write Address Setup

Since there is more than one type of PLCs, we need to assign a

Read/Write Address for each PLC. Therefore, [/] denotes the separation from its register address.

Note that this function is not applicable on all HMI models; please refer to Appendix A. - Table of the ADP 6.0 Features and HMI Models .

Example: The connection of

Section 7.2. Connection Setup .

No. Device Name Device Type

1

2

Connection 1

Connection 2

3 Connection 3

Follow the steps：

Mitsubishi FX Series

Simatic S7-200 (via PPI；1 to 1 )

Modbus TCP/IP Device

1. For Connection 1, in the [Write] and [Read] box, enter “1/Y1” for the bit address and “1/Y1D100” for the register address.

“1” is [No.] column 1, it can be omitted and enter “Y1”.

2. For Connection 2, in the [Write] and [Read] box, enter

“2/Q0.0” for the bit address. Notice that “2” refers to

Connection No. 2 and “/” denotes the separation from its register address. See below.

3. For Connection 3, in the [Write] and [Read] box, enter “3/1” for the bit address. Notice that “3” refers to Connection No. 3 and “/” denotes the separation from its register address. We have to include “/” in the setup. See below.

370




371

8. Macro

8. Macro

ADP offers user a convenient and powerful Macro application; Macro enables the Workstation to execute a number of tasks: Arithmetic,

Logic, Flow Control, Data Transfer, Comparison, Conversion and system service instructions, etc. Using Macro can also significantly save the program size and optimize the efficiency in PLC. In Macro, not only can the Workstation communicate to the PLC but also connect to other devices. Thus Macro provides an efficient integration system as well as an economical structure in hardware application.


371

8. Macro

Macro offers user a number of functions in different situations and applications. A user can define the application according to the needs in the corresponding Marco window. PWS HMI will execute the macro commands according to the different modes. Macro is categorized into the following commands:

A. Application Macro commands：There are three types of macro commands in the [Application] menu.

1. INITIAL Macro: The purposes of INITIAL Macro are data initialization and communication parameters declaration. This command is executed only once when an application is started and the start-up screen is not appeared until this command is executed. There is one

INITIAL Macro in one application.

2. BACKGROUND Macro ： When the HMI runs the application, the macro commands will execute cyclically.

The maximum macro commands are 30 rows. The macro commands will execute whatever the current screen is.

The common use for BACKGROUND Macro is communication control and PLC sampling data convert….etc.

3. CLOCK Macro：When the HMI runs this application, the entire macro commands will be executed every 500ms.

372


8. Macro

The common use for Clock Macro is display control, PLC bit monitor, timer control, data timer convert…etc.

B. Screen Macro Commands：There are three macro commands in the [Screen] menu.

1. OPEN Macro：OPEN Macro is executed when the screen is commanded to be opened. The common use for OPEN

Macro is screen initialization, display control, internal register or bit initialization….etc.

2. CLOSE Macro：CLOSE Macro is executed when the screen is commanded to be closed. The CLOSE Macro will execute its command once.

3. CYCLIC Macro：CYCLIC Macro is executed cyclically when the screen is display. The HMI will execute the

BACKGROUND Macro and CLOCK Macro periodically.


373

8. Macro

C. ON/OFF Macro Commands：There are two ON/OFF macro commands in push-button object.

1. ON Macro：ON Macro is executed when the button is clicked and set a bit to be ON. The common use for ON

Macro is the action of push-button, the control of chain process or the effect of displaying the initial screen and

PLC register and bit initilialization…etc.

2. OFF Macro：OFF Macro is executed when the button is clicked and released a bit to be OFF. Then the HMI will execute the Macro commands once. The common use for

HMI is the action of push-button, the control of sequence process, the effect of displaying the close screen…etc.

D. Sub-Macro Commands：A user can select [Sub-Macro] from the [Object] menu.

1. Sub-Macro ： It is the sub-command of Macro.

Sub-Macro is executed by the HMI with CALL command. The common use for Sub-Macro is to edit and save some basic functions or arithmetic commands for Macro.

374


8. Macro


375

8. Macro

The following details the macro commands and the formats. For the setup, please refer to the next section.

Operation Format A1

*

A2* A3* Data

Format

PLC

Data

OR A1=A2 | A3 2 2,4 2,4 DW X

MOV A1= A2 0,2 0,2,4 ~ DW O

FILL FILL(A1,A2,A3) 2,4

GETX A1=@X

SETY @Y=A1

2,4

X

X

2,4 X

X

IF==

IF!=

IF>

IF>=

IF<

IF<=

IF AND

==0

IF AND

!=0

IF==ON

IF==OFF

IF A1==A2 GOTOA3 2,4 2,4 4 DW/Signed X

IF A1!=A2 GOTOA3

IF A1>A2 GOTOA3

IF A1>=A2 GOTOA3 2,4 2,4

IF A1<A2 GOTOA3 2,4 2,4 4 DW/Signed X

IF A1<=A2 GOTOA3 2,4 2,4 4 DW/Signed X

IF A1 AND A2==0

THEN GOTO A3

IF A1 AND A2!=0

THEN GOTO A3

2,4 2,4

2,4 2,4

4

4

4

DW/Signed X

DW/Signed X

DW/Signed X

2,4 2,4 4 DW

2,4 2,4 4 DW

IF A1=ON GOTO A2 3 4

IF A1=OFFGOTO A2 3 4

~ Bit

~ Bit

X

X

X

X

*

The useable range of memory will be indetified according to the commands. The number in the table represent :

0=PLC Device (Word), 1=PLC Device (Bit),

2=Internal Memory(Word), 3=Internal Memory(Bit),

4=Constant, 5=ASCII Character.

376


8. Macro

Operation Format

IF-THEN

IF condition

DO

ENDIF

♦

THEN

IF-THEN-ELSE IF condition

DO

ELSE DO

ENDIF

Nest IF-THEN-

ELSE

♦

THEN

IF condition

DO

♦

THEN

IF-THEN-ELSE

ELSE DO

ELIF

IF-THEN-ELSE

ENDIF

IF condition 1

♦

THEN

DO

ELIF condition 2

THEN DO

♦

ELIF condition 3

THEN DO

♦

ENDIF

GOTO Goto label A1

RET

NEXT

SETB

CLRB

INVB

Return

Next

Bit setting A1

Bit resetting A1

Bit inversion A1

A1

*

A2* A3* Data

Format

2,4 2,4 ~ Condition

2,4 2,4 ~ Condition

2,4 2,4 ~ Condition

2,4 2,4 ~ Condition

♦

♦

♦

♦

PLC

Data

X

X

X

X

4 ~ ~ X

~ ~ ~

X

2,4 ~ X

X

X

~ ~ ~

1,3 ~ ~ Bit

1,3 ~

1,3 ~

~

~

Bit

Bit

O

O

X

O

X

*


0=PLC Device (Word), 1=PLC Device (Bit),



♦

Condition includes A1==A2, A1!=A2, A1>A2, A1>=A2, A1<A2, A1<=A2,

(A1&A2)==0, (A1&A2)!=0, A1==ON或A1==OFF

。

A1 and A2 are only for internal memory and constant.


377

8. Macro

X

X

TIMETICK A1= 2 X

COMMENT #A1="Chars" X

SYS SYS(A1,A2)

Operation Format A1

*

A2* A3* Data

Format

SYS(SET_TIMER,N) 4

SYS(STOP_TIMER,N) 4

SYS(SET_COUNTER,N) 4

SYS(WAIT_TIMER,N)

SYS(INI_COM,N)

SYS(GET_CHAR,N)

SYS(GET_CHARS,N)

SYS(PUT_CHAR,N)

4

4

4

4

4

SYS(PUT_CHARS,N) 4

SYS(READ_WORDS,N) 4

SYS(READ_位元 S,N) 4

X

PLC

Data

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

SYS(WRITE_WORDS,N) 4

SYS(WRITE_位元,N)

SYS(SUM_ADD,N)

SYS(SUM_XOR,N)

4

4

4

X

X

X

X

Arithmetic

[Notes]: Only internal memory can be used in these commands. The internal memory includes @, RCPW, CB, RCPNO and *@ (indirect internal memory). The data format is Word, Double-Word, Signed binary and Unsigned binary.

Format: A1 = A2 + A3

Description: Adds A2 and A3 and saves the result in A1.

♦ ADD → Format: A1 = A2+A3. Adds A2 and A3 and saves the result in A1.

*


0=PLC Device(Word), 1=PLC Device(Bit),



378


8. Macro

♦ SUB → Format: A1 = A2-A3. Subtracts A3 from A2 and saves the result in A1.

♦ MUL → Format: A1 = A2×A3.

♦ DIV → Format: A1 = A2/A3. A1 is quotient and A3 cannot be zero.

♦ MOD → Format: A1 = A2%A3. A1 is remainder and A3 cannot be zero.

Logical

Notes: Only internal memory can be used in these commands. The internal memory includes @, RCPW, CB, RCPNO and *@ (indirect internal memory). The data format is Word, Double-Word…etc. (no

Signed binary, floating point number arithmetic).

OR → Format: A1=A2 | A3.。The truth table as left-side：

Performs the bit-wise “OR” operation of A2 (word) and A3 (word) and saves the result in A1 (word).

♦ Or the bit-wise “OR” operation of A2 (Dword) and A3 (Dword) and saves the result in A1 (Dword).

♦ AND → Format: A1 = A2& A3. The truth table as left-side：

Performs the bit-wise “AND” operation of A2 (word) and A3

(word) and saves the result in A1 (word).

♦ Or performs the bit-wise “AND” operation of A2 (Dword) and

A3 (Dword) and saves the result in A1 (Dword).

♦ XOR → Format: A1=A2 ^ A3. The truth table as left-side：

Performs the bit-wise exclusive OR operation of A2 (word) and A3 (word) and saves the result in A1 (word).

♦ Or performs the bit-wise exclusive OR operation of A2 (Dword) and A3 (Dword) and saves the result in A1 (Dword).

♦ SHL → Format: A1=A2 << A3. Shifts A2 (word) left by A3 bits and saves the result in A1 (word). left shift command fills 0 into bit 0 and the last bit will shift out. If the displacement(A3) is greater than 16 ,then 16 will be the most shiftable amount.

♦ Or shift A2 (Dword) left by A3 bits and saves the result in A1

(Dword). Left shift command fills 0 into bit 0 and the last bit


379

8. Macro

will shift out. If the displacement(A3) is greater than 32 ,then

32 will be the most shiftable amount.

♦ SHR → Format: A1=A2 >> A3. Shifts A2 (word) right by A3 bits and saves the result in A1 (word). Right shift command fills 0 into bit 15 and the last bit will shift out. If the displacement(A3) is greater than 16 ,then 16 will be the most shiftable amount.

♦ Or shifts A2 (Dword) right by A3 bits and saves the result in

A1 (Dword). Right shift command fills 0 into bit 31 and the last bit will shift out. If the displacement(A3) is greater than

32 ,then 32 will be the most shiftable amount.

Data transfer

[Notes]: Both MOV and BMOV command can be located in the PLC memory or internal memory. These include @, RCPW, CB, RCPNO and *@ (indirect internal memory). The data format of this command is Word.

♦ MOV →Format: A1 (Word) =A2 (Word), A1 (Dword) = A2

(Dword). The MOV command is to copy the value of A2 to A1 and the value of A2 is fixed. If A1 is located in PLC, it represents the A2 data in HMI internal register will write in

PLC. If A2 is located in PLC, it represents the A2 data will be read and shift to HMI internal register A1.

♦ BMOV → Format: BMOV (A1, A2, A3).Copy a block of data starting at A2 to the memory block starting at A1. A3 specifies the number of Words to be copied. The data format is Word.

The BMOV command is to copy a block of A3 starting at A2 to the A3 block starting at A1, and the A2 data is fixed. The number of A3 must be between 2 and 524. Format: BMOV (A1,

A2, A3)

♦ FILL → Format: FILL (A1, A2, A3). Fill a block of memory starting at A1 with the value of A2. A3 specifies the number of words to be filled. The data format is Word. The Fill command is to fill A2 data into a block of A3 starting at A1, A2 data is fixed. The number of A3 must be between 2 and 524.

♦ CHR → Format: CHR (A1, “A2”). Copy the character string

A2 to A1. The data of A1 is in ASCII format.

380


8. Macro

♦ GETX → Format: A1 = @X. Convert @X input signal to A1.

The A1 data is numeric value. This command is only applicable on PWS520S model.

♦ SETY → Format: @Y = A1. Covert A1 to output signal. The

A1 data is numeric value. This command is only applicable on

PWS520S model.

♦ X2Y → Format: X2Y (A1, A2). Convert input to output. This command is only applicable on PWS520S model.

If A2 value is not zero, the specified internal bit A1 is enabled. When

A2 value is zero, the action of the specified internal bit A1 is disabled. There are eight internal bits (from 0 to 7) in PWS-520S. A internal bit can assign the corresponding input point and output point which the sensitive time needs to greater than 20 msec.

When cancel the action internal point, the relative digital output point will be reset.

Comparison

[Notes]: Only internal memory can be used in these commands. The internal memory includes @, RCPW, CB, RCPNO and *@ (indirect internal memory).

♦ IF ==→ Format: IF A1 == A2 THEN GOTO LABEL A3. Goes to LABEL A3 if A1 is equal to A2.

♦ IF!= → Format: IF A1!=A2 THEN GOTO LABEL A3. Goes to LABEL A3 if A1 is not equal to A2.

♦ IF > → Format: IF A1>A2 THEN GOTO LABEL A3. Goes to

LABEL A3 if A1 is greater than A2.

♦ IF >= → Format: IF A1>=A2 THEN GOTO LABEL A3. Goes to LABEL A3 if A1 is greater than or equal to A2.

♦ IF < → Format: IF A1<A2 THEN GOTO LABEL A3. Goes to

LABEL A3 if A1 is less than A2.

♦ IF <= → Format: IF A1<=A2 THEN GOTO LABEL A3. Goes to LABEL A3 if A1 is less than or equal to A2.

♦ IF AND == 0 → Format: IF (A1&A2) == 0 THEN GOTO

LABEL A3. Goes to LABEL A3 if the result of AND operation of A1 and A2 is 0.


381

8. Macro

♦ IF AND! = 0 → Format: IF (A1&A2)! = 0 THEN GOTO

LABEL A3. Goes to LABEL A3 if the result of AND operation of A1 and A2 is not 0.

♦ IF == ON → Format: IF A1==ON THEN GOTO LABEL A2.

If bit A1 is ON (1) then goes to LABEL A2.

♦ IF ==OFF → Format: IF A1==OFF THEN GOTO LABEL A2.

If bit A1 is OFF (0) then goes to LABEL A2.

♦ IF condition THEN DO Macro ENDIF → If the condition is true, the HMI will execute the Macro. See below:：

1. If @100 is equal to 50, then the following Macro will be executed.

2. Force PLC Output Y0 to be 1(ON).


4. End of the IF condition.

5. End of the Macro.

♦ IF condition THEN DO Macro-A ELSE DO Macro-B ENDIF

→

If the condition is true, the HMI will execute Macro-A. If the condition is not true, the HMI will execute Macro-B. See below:

1. If @100 is equal to 50, then the following

Macro will be executed.



4. If @100 is not equal to 50, the following


5. Force PLC Output Y0 to be 0(OFF).


7. End of the If condition.

8. End of the Macro.

♦ IF condition THEN DO

IF-THEN-ELSE-A

ELSE DO

382


8. Macro

E

N

I

D

F

-

B

L

S

E

I

F

-

T

H

-

E

E

N

→

假

如

1. If @100 is greater than 50, then the following


2. If @100 is greater than 50 and @100 is greater than 80, then the following Macro will be executed.



5. Force PLC OutputY1 to be 0(OFF).


7. If @100 is greater than 50 but @100 is less than 80, then the following Macro will be executed.

8. Force PLC OutputY2 to be 1(ON).




12. End of the No. 2 IF condition.

13. If @100 is not greater than 50, then the following Macro will be executed.

14. If @100 is not greater than 50 and @100 is less than 30, then the following Macro will be executed.

條

件



成


立


，

則

執

19. If @100 is not greater than 50 and @100 is not greater than 30, then the following Macro will be executed.

行


另


一

個


I

-

F


24. End of No.14 IF condition.

T

H

25. End of No. 1 IF condition.

26. End of Macro.

E

If N-ELSE-A is not true, IF-THEN-ELSE-B will be executed. See below:


383

8. Macro

♦ IF condition-1 THEN DO

Macro-A

ELIF condition-2 THEN DO

Macro-B

ELIF condition-3 THEN DO

Macro-C

ENDIF

→

If condition-1 is true, Macro-A will be executed; if condition-1 is not true but condition-2 is true, Macro-B will be executed; if condition-1 and condition-2 are not true but condition-3 is true,

Macro-C will be executed. See below:

1. If @100 is greater than 10, then the following Macro will be executed.

2. Call Sub-macro 10.

3. If @100 is not greater than 10 but

@100is greater than 5, the following


4. Call sub-Macro 5.

5. If @100 is not greater than 10 but @100 is not greater than 5 and @100 is greater than 1, then the following Macro will be executed.

6. Call sub-Macro 1.

7. End of If condition.

8. End of Macro.

Flow Control

[Notes]: Only internal memory can be used in these commands.

384


8. Macro

♦ GOTO → Format: GOTO LABEL A1. Goes to LABLE A1 unconditionally. The GOTO command will cause a branch to the specified label (Label A1). And LABEL A1 must be in the

Macro.

♦ LABEL → Format: LABEL A1. Note that no two labels are allowed to have the same number in one Macro but the same number in Macros is acceptable.

♦ CALL → Call Sub-macro. Format: CALL A1. Call command can assign the control to sub-macro. The common use of submacro is to execute some specific functions, passing the parameter table, complex instruction set…etc. Note that the specified sub-macro must exist and return by RET command where the end of the sub-macro. Then the next macro will be executed. The number of sub-macro is from 001 to 512, and allowed to name. Besides, sub-macro is assigned to CALL another sub-macro.

♦ RET → Return to Macro. RET command only exists in Sub-

Macro but Call exist in Macro. Each RET command must have a corresponding CALL command.

♦ FOR..NEXT → Loop, “FOR” is the start of a loop and

“NEXT” is the end of a loop. Note that the maximum number of FOR loop is 3, e.g. FOR A1. .NEXT. FOR loop is formed by the pair of FOR and NEXT commands, and executes the macro instructions within the FOR loop by A1 times. A1 can be variable and constant. When A1 is 0, the Macro will skip the

FOR loop and execute the next line of code after the Next command. When A1 is greater than 0, the Macro will execute

A1 continuously until the end of the FOR loop. And a user can change the A1 value within the FOR commands. Note that if

A1 is too great, CPU will overload and malfunction.

♦ FOR/NEXT loop command can execute the program repeatedly.

Each FOR command must have one corresponding NEXT command. One is allowed to have up 3 nested FOR loops, e.g.

FOR @1…, FOR @2…, [email protected],NEXT,NEXT.

♦ END → End the Macro. END command represents the end of the Macro. The Macro will not execute the next line of code after the END command and start to the first line of code next time.

Note: END command represents the end of the MACRO, it is invalid in SUB-MACRO. SUN-MACRO must use RET command; otherwise, the program will cause errors.


385

8. Macro

Data Conversion

[Notes]: Only internal memory can be used in these commands. The internal memory includes @, RCPW, CB, RCPNO and *@ (indirect internal memory).

♦ BCD → Convert BIN to BCD. Format: A1 = BCD (A2). This command is used to convert A2 (Integer, Word or Dword) from a binary number to a BCD number and saves the result in A1.

The valid integer of A2 is between 0 and 9999 (Word) or 0 and

99999999 (Dword).

♦ BIN → Convert BCD to BIN. Format: A1 = BIN (A2). This command is to convert A2 from a BCD number (Word or

Dword) to a binary number and saves the result in A1

(Integer,Word or Dword). The valid BCD number is between 0 and 9999 (Word), or 0 and 99999999 (Dword).

♦ W2D → Convert WORD to DOUBLE WORD. Format: A1 =

W2D (A2). The W2D command is to convert A2 from a

WORD number (Integer) to a DOUBLE WORD (Integer) and saves the result in A1 (Dword, signed or unsigned). The valid integer of A2 is between 0 and 65535 (Word,unsigned) or -

32768 and 32767 (Word,signed).

This function can extend the size of 16 bits signed integer(Word) to 32 bits integer(DWord).

♦ B2W → Convert BYTE to WORD. Format: A1 = B2W (A2,

A3). The byte array is starting at A2 with the size A3 and the result is saved in the memory starting at A1 (WORD). The high bytes of the word array are set to be 0.

♦ W2B → Convert WORD to BYTE. Format: A1 = W2B (A2,

A3). The word array is starting at A2 with the size of A3. The result is saved in the memory starting at A1. The conversion will discard the high bytes of the A2 word array.

♦ SWAP → Swap the Bytes, Format: SWAP (A1, A2). The

SWAP command is to swap the low byte and high byte of each word of a memory block starting at A1. A2 specifies the size of the memory block in word. After executing, the Al data will be changed.

♦ MAX → Maximum. Format: A1 = MAX (A2, A3). Sets A1 to the larger one in A2 and A3. (The data format can be in word, dword, signed binary or unsigned binary.)

386


8. Macro

♦ MIN → Minimum. Format: A1 = MAX (A2, A3). Sets A1 to the smaller one in A2 and A3. (The data format can be word, dword, signed binary or unsigned binary.)

♦ A2H → Convert 4-digit hex number in ASCII character form into a binary number. Format: A1 = A2H (A2). The character of the fourth digit is in word A2 and the characters of the other digits are in the words following A2 in sequence. The result will be saved in A1. For example, suppose A2 as @200 and the data in @210=9538H. After the conversion, the result will be saved in A1=@210 and it is @200=0039H, @201=0033H,

@202=0035H and @203=0038H. (The data format is only in word.)

♦ H2A → Convert a 16-bit binary number into a 4-digit hex number in ASCII character form. Format: A1 = A2H (A2). The number to be converted is in A2. The character of the fourth digit will be saved in A1 and the characters of the other digits will be saved in the words following A1 in sequence. For example, suppose A2 as @100 and the data in @100=1234H.

After the conversion, the result will be saved in A1=@110 and it is @110=0031H, @111=0032H, @112=0033H and

@113=0034H. (The data format is only in word.)

Bit Setting

Others

Both internal memory and PLC bit can be used including @nnn.b，

RCPWnnn.b in these commands.

♦ SETB →Set bit to be ON. Format: SETB A1。

♦ CLRB →Set bit to be OFF. Format: CLRB A1。

♦ INVB →Inverse the bit state. Format: INVB A1.

There are three special commands to use.

TIMETICK → Get the current system time tick ( CPU internal clock time). Format: A1= TIMETICK (). The system time tick is increased by 1 in every 100 ms.


387

8. Macro

♦ COMMENT → This is a non-executable instruction and its purpose is to make comments in macro.

♦ SYS → There are a number of system services which can be used in SYS command. please refer to the complete detail in the following:

A) SET_TIMER →Specify the internal timer. Format:

SYS(SET_TIMER,N) 。

@N : Time number. The number of N is between 0 and 7.

@N+1: Current Timer Value.

@N+2: Timer Limit.

@N+3

:

Time-up Flag.

@N+4: Type of Operation as below:

Timer will stop when reach the default setting, the

0 flag will set to be 1.

1 Timer resets to be 0 automatically when the flag is changed to be 0 or 1. When the flag is 1, the timer resets to be 0 automatically. When the flag is 0, the timer resets to be 0 automatically.

2 (PWS-520S only) Does the operations in Type 0 and sets the corresponding digital output Yn, where n =

0~7.

3 (PWS-520S only) Does the operations in Type 1 and toggles the corresponding digital output Yn; where n=0~7.

B) STOP_TIMER →Stops the internal timer . Format: SYS

(STOP_TIMER,N).

C) SET_COUNTER → Set the internal counter, it is only applicable on PWS520S.

@N: Counter number. The number of N is between 0 and 7.

@N+1: Current Counter Value .

@N+2: Counter Limit.

@N+3:

Over-Limit Flag.

@N+4:

Type of Operation as below:

0 Counter will stop when reach the default setting, the flag will set to be 1.

1 Counter resets to be 0 automatically when the flag is

388


8. Macro

changed to be 0 or 1. When the flag is 1, the counter resets to be 0 automatically. When the flag is 0, the counter resets to be 0 automatically.

2 (PWS-520S only) Does the operations in Type 0 and sets the corresponding digital output Yn, where n =

0~7.

3 (PWS-520S only) Does the operations in Type 1 and toggles the corresponding digital output Yn; where n=0~7.

D) STOP_COUNTER → Stop the internal counter. Format:

SYS(STOP_COUNTER,N).

E) WAIT_TIMER→ Wait for the time-up event in the internal timer.

Format: SYS (WAIT_TIMER,N). The macro instruction following this command will not be executed until the timer reaches to the Timer

Limit. Remember that the corresponding timer must be activated by the SET_TIMER service before requesting this service.

F) WAIT_COUNTER→ Wait for the over-limit event in the internal counter, it is only allocable on PWS520S. Format:

(WAIT_COUNTER,N). The macro instruction following this command will not be executed until the counter reaches to the Counter

Limit. Remember that the corresponding counter must be activated by the SET_COUNTER service before requesting this service.

G) INIT_COM → Select and initialize a COM port. Format: SYS

(INIT_COM,N). The word @n specifies the communication setting of the COM port. The format of the setting is shown in the following:

Bit 1,Bit 0 →DATA Bit S 10：7 Bit S,11：8 Bit S.

Bit 2 →STOP Bit S 0：1 位元,1：2 Bit S.

Bit 4, Bit 3 →PARITY.> 00：NONE, 01：ODD, 11：EVEN.

Bit 6, Bit 5 →COM PORT > 00：COM1, 01：COM2, 10：COM3,

11：COM4.

Bit 7 → Not used.

Bit11,Bit 10,Bit 9,Bit 8 → 0001 ： 115200, 0010 ： 57600, 0011 ：

38400, 0110：19200, 1100：9600, Others：4800.


389

8. Macro

Bit 15 → Computer Protocol Driver ; 0: Disable, 1: Enable (This command is only applicable on PWS1711-Macro, PWS1711-Color,

PWS1760, PWS3260, PWS3760)

If this service is successful, then the word @n+1 will be set to be 1; otherwise, it will be set to be 0.

There are some models (e.g. PWS1711-Macro and PWS1711-Color) providing Computer Protocol slave driver for the second com port;

This function provides the communication between PC/another PWS and PWS1711-Macro and PWS1711-Color in the second com port.

The HMI can communicate with PLC over the first com port and the connection steps are the same as usual steps. The PC can read from the internal registers of PWS1711 @0-@639 over the second port (The data of W0-W639 is correspondent with @0-@639). For PWS1762,

PWS3160, PWS3760, the PC can read from the internal registers @0-

@2047 (The data of W0-W2047 is correspondent with @0-@2047).

To communicate with SoftPanel or another PWS, the controller/PLC must be Computer (as slave) and the PLC station must set as the PWS station and the related format must be the same as the format of

INIT_COM.

When use the Computer Protocol driver, this function is inapplicable on GET_CHAR, GET_CHARS, PUT_CHAR, and PUT_CHARS.

H) GET_CHAR → Gets a character from the COM port. Format: SYS

(GETCHAR,N). The character will be saved in the low byte of the word @n. If there is no input, the word @n will be set to be -1(ffffH).

I)GET_CHARS → Gets a number of characters from the COM port.

Format: SYS (GETCHARS,N). The word @n specifies the maximum number of characters to receive. The actual number of characters received is then saved in word @n+1. The characters received will be saved in the low bytes of the word @n+2, @n+3, @n+4 and so on.

J) PUT_CHAR → Sends a character in the low byte of word @n to the

COM port. Format: SYS (PUTCHAR,N). If this service is successful, then the word @n+1 will be set to be 1; otherwise, it will be set to be other value.

K) PUT_CHARS →Sends the characters in the low bytes of the words starting from @n+2 to the COM port. Format: SYS (PUTCHARS,N).

Also, the word @n specifies the number of characters to be sent and the actual number of characters sent is then saved in the word @n+1.

L) SUM_ADD → Calculates the sum of a block of words by normal arithmetic addition. Format: SYS (SUM_ADD,N). The output data will save in “@N+3”, this feature offers more convenient application

390


8. Macro

for Macro. For example, SYS (SUM_ADD,30) represents N = 30, this command will calculate the sum of @30,@31,@32,@33 internal registers.

@N=30 represents the pointer parameter, and the internal value of

@30 must be 0.

@N+1(@31) represents the starting address of the block.

@N+2(@32) represents the size of WORDS block.

@N+3(@33) represents the initial value of the summand and the sum will save in this address automatically. A user must set the summand before execution. Most communication protocols regulate the initial value of summand = 00H or FFH, please refer to initial value assigned by vendor.

M) SUM_XOR → Calculate the sum of a block of words by the bitwise logical exclusive-or operation and save the result in the specified address. Format: SYS(SUM_XOR,N). The output data will save in

“@N+3”, this feature is convenient for Macro communication application. For example, SYS(SUM_XOR,50) represents N = 50, this command will calculate the sum of @50,@51,@52,@53 internal registers. To execute this command requires the internal value of @50,

@51, @52, and @53.

@N=50 represents PLC station number, and the internal value of

@50must be 0 if no PLC station is required.

@N+1(@51) represents the starting address of the block.

@N+2(@52) represents the size of WORDS block.

@N+3(@53) represents the initial value of the summand and the sum will save in this address automatically. A user must set the summand before execution. Most communication protocols regulate the initial value of summand = 00H or FFH, please refer to initial value assigned by vendor.

N) READ_WORDS → Read a number of words from PLC word devices or internal memory and save the result in the specified address.

Format: SYS (READ_WORDS,N). The data will save in “@+5”. This command is powerful for the communication with the any PLC registers and can be used as PLC data setting and monitor. For example, SYS(READ_WORDS,80) represents N = 80. To execute this command requires the internal value of @80, @81, @82, @83, @84,

@85, @86.


391

8. Macro

@N (@80) represents PLC station number, and the internal value of

@80 must be 0 if no PLC station is required.

@N+1(@81) represents the device type setting. For the device type of

PLC, please refer to Chapter 9.


@N+2(@82) represent the low word of the device address.

@N+3(@83) represent high word of the device address.

@N+4(@84) represent auxiliary address if required or set to be 0.

@N+5(@85) represent the address of the internal memory to receive the data and the size of data is specified by N+6(@86).

@N+6(@86) represent the number of words to be read.

O) READ_Bit → Read a PLC bit device or internal bit and save the data in the specified address. Format: SYS (READ_Bit,N). The data will save in “@+5”. This command is powerful for the communication with the any PLC bit-state and can be used as PLC data setting and monitor. For example, SYS(READ_bit,80) represents N = 80. . To execute this command requires the internal value of @80, @81, @82,

@83, @84, and @85.

@N(@80) represents PLC station number, and the internal value of


@N+1(@81) represents the device type. For the device type of PLCs, please refer to Chapter 9. for the complete details.

@N+2(@82) represents low word of the device address.

@N+3(@83) represents high word of the device address.

@N+4(@84) represents auxiliary address if required or set 0.

@N+5(@85) represents the address of the internal memory to receive the data. N+5(@85) DATA = 1 if the bit is ON; DATA = 0 if the bit is

OFF.

P) WRITE_WORDS → Writes a block of data in internal memory to

PLC word devices or internal memory. Format:

SYS(WRITE_WORDS,N). The data will save in “@N+5”. This command is powerful for the random modification of the any PLC data and can be used as PLC data setting and monitor. For example,

SYS(WRITE_WORDS,90) represents N = 90. To execute this command requires the internal value of @90, @91, @92, @93, @94, @95 and @96.

392


8. Macro







@N+5(@95) represents the source address and the size of a continuous block of data is assigned by N+6 (@96).

@N+6(@96) represents the number of words of the data.

Q) WRITE_Bit → Set a PLC bit device or internal bit to the state of an internal word. Format: SYS(WRITE_Bit,N). The source address is

“@+5”. This command is powerful for the random modification of the any PLC data and can be used as PLC data setting and monitor. For example, SYS(WRITE_Bit,90) represents N = 90. To execute this command requires the internal value of @90, @91, @92, @93, @94, and @95.







@N+5(@95) represents the address of the internal memory to receive the data. N+5(@95) DATA = 1 if the bit is ON; DATA = 0 if the bit is

OFF.


393

8. Macro

8.4. Cautions

The last line of code must be RET command, otherwise it will cause error when COMPILE.

Except for Sub-Macro, the END Macro represents the end of the

Macro.

CPU will execute other program after the execution of INITIAL

MACRO, CLOCK MACRO, ON/OFF MACRO, OPEN MACRO, and

CLOSE MACRO.

For BACKGROUND MACRO, CYCLIC MACRO, Sub-MACRO,

CPU executes the 30 rows of command once; then the CPU will execute other program. The CPU will execute the 30 rows of command which follows the last executed command until the next cycle.

To use the Macro communication function, a user must define the related communication format for INICOM. This command is only used once, so it is usually edited in INITIAL MACRO.

394


8. Macro

The HMI provides some internal registers for read/write. With these internal registers, a user can operate the Macro more efficiently and conveniently. The internal registers can not only enhance Macro with infinite functions but also hold a lot of arithmetic data source and result.

Note that this system provides the internal registers divided into RAM and ROM.

We will details the four types of internal memory in the following:

Aux. R/W

Type Address

RCPNO 0x80 W 0 (only one word)

RCPWn 0x81 W 0-?

0 R/W

0 R/W

0 R

@n 0x85 W 8191 (for PWS6000 series)

0 R/W

位元

Device

Type

CBn.b (b=0-f) 0x83

RCPWn.b (b=0-f) 0x84

@n.b (b=0-f)

@n.b (b=0-f)

0x86

0x86

0-31

0-?

Address

0-15

0-15

R

R/W

0-10239 (for PWS3261) 0-15

0-8191 (for PWS6000

R/W

0-15 R/W series)

1. RCPNO.

2. The n value of RCPWn is based on the size of recipe and the maximum number. The data register can be used as bit.

3. The n value of CBn is based on the size of the control block.

The current size is 2~32. This data register can be used as bit.

4. @n: Internal Register. The size of n is based on the HMI model. The size of PWS500S, PWS1711 is 640 WORDS

(n=0~639), and the size of PWS1760, PWS3760, SoftPanel is

10240 WORDS(n=0~10239). This data register can be used by bit.


395

9. Communication with PLC and PWS


Note :『The Register and Range of Relay Numbers』 in this document refers to the range of the setup in ADP. In practice, please also make sure not to exceed the maximum of the range defined by the PLC-CPU in use. Otherwise, it will cause communication error.

This chapter provides the current information on the settings of the supported PLCs as of this writing. As PLC vendors continue to release new models, the data capacity, the data range and the drivers of the PLCs are also often changed. For the latest information, user can contact HITECH.

Communication Format: To properly communicate between PLC snd PWS, the setting of

[Communication Format], [Station], [Baud Speed],[Data Format] must be consistence.

Before connection, please adjust the settting of PWS’and PLC’s communication parameters and dip-switch.

396



9.1. AB Micrologic 1000/1500

1. The data setting and range of PLC which ADP can access : Word Decive

Register Type Format Range with the

Register

Device Type

/ Aux. ddress

Data Size

R/W

O:0.n n=0-3

I:1.n n=0-3

0 0

9

1 0

9

S2:nn nn=0-65 2 2

9

B3:nnn nnn=0-254 3 3 9

Timer flag T4:nnn nnn=0-254

Timer Preset Value T4:nnn.pre nnn=0-254

4

5

4

4

Word

Word

9

9

T4:nnn.acc Word 9 Timer Accumulator

Value

Counter flag

Counter Preset

Value

C5:nnn nnn=0-254 7 5 Word 9

C5:nnn.pre Word 9

Counter

Accumulator Value

Control file

Control Size of 位

元

Array

C5:nnn.ac

c nnn=0-254

R6:nnn nnn=0-254

R6:nnn.len nnn=0-254

9 5

10

11

6

6

Word

Word

9

9

9

Control Reserved file

R6:nnn.po

s

6

9

Integer file N7:nnn nnn=0-254 13 7 Word

9

Floating point number

F8:nnn nnn=0-254 14 8 9

**

The HMI does not support block read for the registers in TIMER, COUNTER AND

CONTROL FILES.

**

One should open the files in PLC which the HMI will access.

2. The data format and range of the PLC ON/OFF location which ADP can access :

Dip Device.

Relay Type

Output

Input

Status

Bit

Format

O:0.n/bb

I:1.n/bb

S2:nn/bb

B3:nnn/bb

Range with the

Relay

Device Type

/ Aux. ddress

Data Size

R/W

n=0-3; bb=0-15 n=0-3; bb=0-15

0xC0 0-15 Word 9

0xC1 0-15 Word 9 nn=0-65; bb=0-15 0xC2 0-15 Word 9 nnn=0-254; bb=0-

15

0xC3 0-15

9


397


Relay Type Format Range with the

Relay

Device Type

/ Aux. ddress

Data Size

R/W

0xC4 0-15

9

Timer

Timer Preset

Value

Timer

Accumulator

Value

Counter flag

T4:nnn/bb nnn=0-254; bb=0-

15

T4:nnn.pre/b b nnn=0-254; bb=0-

15

T4:nnn.acc/b b nnn=0-254; bb=0-

15

0xC5 0-15

9

0xC6 0-15 9

Counter Preset

Value

Counter

Accumulator

Value

Control

C5:nnn/bb nnn=0-254; bb=0-

15

C5:nnn.pre/b b nnn=0-254; bb=0-

15

C5:nnn.acc/ bb nnn=0-254; bb=0-

15

0xC7 0-15 9

0xC8 0-15 9

0xC9 0-15 9

Control Size of

Bit Array

Control

Reserved

R6:nnn/bb nnn=0-254; bb=0-

15

R6:nnn.len/b b nnn=0-254; bb=0-

15

R6:nnn.pos/ bb nnn=0-254; bb=0-

15

0xCA 0-15 9

0xCB 0-15 9

0xCC 0-15 9

Integer N7:nnn/bb nnn=0-254; bb=0-

15

0xCD 0-15 9

**

The Workstation does not support block read for the bits in TIMER, COUNTER and

CONTROL FILES.

3. The illustration of the connection: PWS to RS232C of PLC 1761-CBL-PM02

398



4. Communication Format: Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the dip-switch as below:

Format PLC Setting

a.Communication Format RS232C

b. Node Address

c. Transmission Speed 19200 bps

d. Transmission Format 1．Size：8-bit

2．Parity：NONE

3．Stop bit：1-bit

e. Com Port FULL DUPLEX

f. CRC ERROR Check YES

PWS Setting

COM2=RS232/422/485

1. When use for RS422, set Dip switch SW10=OFF.

2. When use for RS485, set switch SW10=ON 2.

1.Set PLC Station No. N in ADP

1. If Dip switch SW5=OFF, set it up in ADP.

2. If Dip switch SW5=ON, set it up in PWS.


399


1. The data format and range of the PLC registers which the ADP can accress :

Word Device.

Register Type

Output file

Input file

Status file

Bit file

Format

O:nnn

I:nnn

S:nnn

Bfff:nnn

B:nnn

Range With the Register

nnn= 0-277 nnn= 0-277 nnn=0-127 fff= 3 or 9-999; default file is 3 if fff omitted; nnn=0-

999 fff= 4 or 9-999; default file is 4 if fff omitted; nnn=0-

999

Data Size

Word

Word

Word

Word

Timer file

Counter file

Control file

Tfff:nnn

T:nnn

Tfff:nnn.PRE

T:nnn.PRE

Tfff:nnn.ACC

T:nnn.ACC

Cfff:nnn

C:nnn

Cfff:nnn.PRE

C:nnn.PRE

Cfff:nnn.ACC

C:nnn.ACC

Rfff:nnn

R:nnn

Rfff:nnn.LEN

R:nnn.LEN

Rfff:nnn.POS

R:nnn.POS fff=5 or 9-999; default file is 5 if fff omitted; nnn=0-

999 fff=6 or 9-999; default file is 6 if fff omitted; nnn=0-

999

Word

Word

Word

Integer file Nfff:nnn

N:nnn fff=7 or 9-999; default file is 7 if fff omitted; nnn=0-

999

Word

** The HMI can read up to 30 words in one read command. The HMI does not support block read for the registers in TIMER, COUNTER AND CONTROL FILES. One should open the files in PLC which the HMI will access.

2. The data format and range of the PLC ON/OFF location which the ADP can accress : Bit Device.

Relay Typ Format

Output file

Input file

Status file

Bit file

O:nnn/bb

I:nnn/bb

S:nnn/bb

Bfff:nnn/bb

Range

nnn= 0-277; bb= 0-17 nnn= 0-277; bb= 0-17 nnn= 0-127; bb= 0-15 fff= 3 or 9-999; default file is 3 if fff omitted;

400



Relay Typ

Timer file

Format

Tfff:nnn/bb

Tfff:nnn.PRE/bb

Tfff:nnn.ACC/bb

Tfff:nnn/EN

Tfff:nnn/TT

Tfff:nnn/DN

Range

nnn=0-999; bb=0-15 fff= 4 or 9-999; default file is 4 if fff omitted; nnn=0-999; bb=0-15

Counter file Cfff:nnn/bb

Cfff:nnn.PRE/bb

Cfff:nnn.ACC/bb

Cfff:nnn/CC

Cfff:nnn/CD

Cfff:nnn/DN

Cfff:nnn/OV

Cfff:nnn/UN

Cfff:nnn/UA

Control file Rfff:nnn/bb

Rfff:nnn.LEN/bb

Rfff:nnn.POS/bb

Rfff:nnn/EN

Rfff:nnn/EU

Rfff:nnn/DN

Rfff:nnn/EM

Rfff:nnn/ER

Rfff:nnn/UL

Rfff:nnn/IN

Rfff:nnn/FD fff=5 or 9-999; default file is 5 if fff omitted; nnn=0-999; bb=0-15 fff=6 or 9-999; default file is 6 if fff omitted; nnn=0-999; bb=0-15

Integer file Nfff:nnn/bb fff=7 or 9-999; default file is 7 if fff omitted; nnn=0-999; bb=0-15

** The HMI can read up to 480 bits in one read command. The HMI does not support block read for the bits in TIMER, COUNTER AND CONTROL FILES.

3. The illustration of the connection: PWS to RS232C of PLC PLC-5


401


4 . Communication Format: Before connection, please set parameters and the dip-switch as below: up the communication

Format

a.Communication Format b. Node Address

c. Transmission Speed

PLC Setting

RS232C PLC-5

N

9600/19200 bps

d. Transmission Format 1.Size 8-bit

2.Parity NONE

3.Stop bit 1-bit

e. SLC-503/504

f. BCC ERROR Check

FULL DUPLEX

YES

PWS Setting

C OM2=RS232/422/485

1. When use for RS422, set Dip s witch SW10=OFF

2. When use for RS485, set s witch SW10=ON

1. Set PLC Station No. N in ADP

402




Word Device.

Register Type

Output file

Input file

Status file

Bit file

Format

O:nn

I:nn

S:nn

Bfff:nnn

B:nnn

Range

nn= 0-30 nn= 0-30 nn=0-31 fff= 3 or 10-255; default file is 3 if fff omitted; nnn=0-

254 fff= 4 or 10-255; default file is 4 if fff omitted; nnn=0-

254

Data Size

Word

Word

Word

Word

Timer file

Counter file

Control file

Tfff:nnn

T:nnn

Tfff:nnn.PRE

T:nnn.PRE

Tfff:nnn.ACC

T:nnn.ACC

Cfff:nnn

C:nnn

Cfff:nnn.PRE

C:nnn.PRE

Cfff:nnn.ACC

C:nnn.ACC

Rfff:nnn

R:nnn

Rfff:nnn.LEN

R:nnn.LEN

Rfff:nnn.POS

R:nnn.POS

Nfff:nnn

N:nnn fff=5 or 10-255; default file is 5 if fff omitted; nnn=0-

254 fff=6 or 10-255; default file is 6 if fff omitted; nnn=0-

254

Word

Word

Word

Integer file fff=7 or 10-255; default file is 7 if fff omitted; nnn=0-

254

Word

**

The HMI can read up to 30 words in one read command.

** The HMI does not support block read for the registers in TIMER, COUNTER AND

CONTROL FILES.

** One should open the files in PLC which the HMI will access.

2. The data format and range of the PLC ON/OFF location which the ADP can accress : Bit Device.

Relay Type

Output file

Input file

Status file

Format

O:nn/bb

I:nn/bb

S:nn/bb

Range

nn= 0-30; bb= 0-15 nn= 0-30; bb= 0-15 nn= 0-31; bb= 0-15


403


Relay Type

Bit file

Timer file

Counter file

Control file

Format

Bfff:nnn/bb

Tfff:nnn/bb

Tfff:nnn.PRE/bb

Tfff:nnn.ACC/bb

Tfff:nnn/EN

Tfff:nnn/TT

Tfff:nnn/DN

Cfff:nnn/bb

Cfff:nnn.PRE/bb

Cfff:nnn.ACC/bb

Cfff:nnn/CU

Cfff:nnn/CD

Cfff:nnn/DN

Cfff:nnn/OV

Cfff:nnn/UN

Rfff:nnn/bb

Rfff:nnn.LEN/bb

Rfff:nnn.POS/bb

Rfff:nnn/EN

Rfff:nnn/DN

Rfff:nnn/ER

Rfff:nnn/UL

Rfff:nnn/IN

Rfff:nnn/FD

Range

fff= 3 or 10-255; default file is 3 if fff omitted; nnn=0-254; bb=0-15 fff= 4 or 10-255; default file is 4 if fff omitted; nnn=0-254; bb=0-15 fff=5 or 10-255; default file is 5 if fff omitted; nnn=0-254; bb=0-15 fff=6 or 10-255; default file is 6 if fff omitted; nnn=0-254; bb=0-15

Integer file Nfff:nnn/bb fff=7 or 10-255; default file is 7 if fff omitted; nnn=0-254; bb=0-15

**

The HMI can read up to 480 bits in one read command.

**

The HMI does not support block read for the bits in TIMER, COUNTER AND

CONTROL FILES.

3. The illustration of the connection: PWS to RS232C of PLC SLC-503/504

404





a.Communication Format RS232C SLC-503/504

b. Node Address

c.Transmission Speed

N

9600/19200 bps

d. Transmission Format 1.Size：8-bit

2.Parity：NONE

3.Stop Bit：1-bit

e. SLC-503/504

f. BCC ERROR Check

FULL DUPLEX

YES

PWS Setting

COM2=RS232/422/485

1. When use for RS422, set Dip switch SW10=OFF 1.

2. When use for RS485, set switch SW10=ON

1. Set PLC Station No. N in ADP


405


9.4. AB IQ Master Servo Controller

1. The data format and range of the PLC registers which the ADP can accress

:

Word Device and Bit Device.

Data Size Register Type

G type

V type

G type

V type

Relay Type

Format

Gnn

Vnn

WGnn

WVnn

Range with the

Register

nn=1-64 nn=1-64 nn=1-64 nn=1-64

I type

O type

B type

F type

Format

Inn

Onn

Bn

Fnn

Range With the

Relay

nn=1-48 nn=1-24 n=1-8 nn=1-64

2. The illustration of the connection: a.

PWS-series to PLC

PWS-series to PLC RS232 PORT (9-pin male)

Double Word(32 Bits)


Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Block



a.Communication Format RS232

PWS Setting

COM1 or COM2=RS232

406


b.Station No 0

c.Transmission Speed 9600 bps

d. Transmission Format 8-bit, NONE, 1-bit



407



:


Register Type

Word IO

Format Range with the Register Data Size

MWnnnnn nnnnn=0 – 37760(must be a multiple of 8)

RWnnnn nnnn=0 - 3071

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits) Word Register

Relay Type

Bit IO

Format

Mnnnnn

Range with the Relay

nnnnn=0-37777(8 Bits)

2. The illustration of the connection: a. PWS-series to PLC RS232 PORT

3. Communication Fo rmat: Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the dip-switch as below:



b.Station No


d.Transmission Format

01(PLC sets 2-197)

9600 bps

8-Bits, ODD , 1-Bit

PWS Setting

RS232

408



master


:Word

Device and Bit Device.


Register

nnnn=0~2047 Data Register

Relat Type

Bit Relay

Wnnnn

Format

Bnnnn


nnnn=0~1023


IPWS-series to PLC RS232 PORT

Data Size

Word(16 Bits)

Block

[Note]: This figure is PC’s simulation but the hook up method depends on the actual controller pin position.


Format

PLC Setting PWS Setting

a.Communication

Format

RS232C(RS422/RS485) RS232C(RS422/RS485)

b.Station No NONE


d.Transmission Format 8-Bits, NONE , 1-Bit

** COMPUTER(AS MASTER ) V2 is not only including the finction of

COMPUTER(AS MASTER ) but also can inform the slaves when the data is changed

(e.g. value input). The Null function includes Macro,ladder and communication to controllers but communication to PLC.


409



:Word


Register

Type

S_Data

X_Data

Format

Snnnn

Xnnn

Range with the Register Data Size

nnnn=0-1008(must be a multiple of 16) Word(16 Bits) nnn= 0-360 (X0-X7, X10-X17, must be a multiple of 20)

Word(16 Bits)

Y_Data

M_Data

T_Register

Ynnn

Mnnnn

Tnnn

Cnnn nnn= 0-360 (Y0-Y7, Y10-Y17, must be a multiple of 20)

Nnnn=0-1264 (must be a multiple of 16) Word(16 Bits) nnn= 0-255

C_Register Cnnn nnnn=0-127

D_Register Dnnnn nnnn=0-1279 nnn= 232-255

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Double Word C_Register


Relay

Block

Multiple of 16

Multiple of 16

S_Data

X_Data

Y_Data

M_Data

T_Coil

C_Coil

Snnnn

Xnnn

Ynnn

Mnnnn

Tnnn

Cnnn nnn=0-1023 nnn=0-377 (Oct. code) nnn=0-377 (Oct. code) nnnn=0-1279 nnn=0-254 nnn=0-254

[Note] X_Data and Y_Data are Oct.code such as

X0~X7,X10~X17,X20~X27,X30~X37.

Multiple of 16

Multiple of 16

Multiple of 16

Multiple of 16


PWS-series to PLC RS232 PORT can use a DELTA with 8-pin male

(

PC ÅÆ DELTA DVP PLC).




b.Station No 01

c.Transmission speed 9600 bps

410


PWS Setting

COM1 or COM2=RS232

1. Set PLC Station No.=01 in ADP

PLC station=01

d.Transmission Format 7-Bits, EVEN , 2-Bits



411



:

Register Type

Word Register

Relay Type

Relay

Format

mmm:Wnnn

Format

mmm:Bnnn


mmm=0-255 ; nnn=0-529


mmm=0-255 ; nnn=1-342


PWS-series to PLC RS485 PORT

Word(16 Bits)




b.Station No None


d.Transmission Format 8-Bits, EVEN , 1-Bit

PWS Setting

RS485

412




:


Register Type

Input Relay

Output Relay

Format

WXnnn

Range with the Register Data

Size

nnn=0-9984; (0 or Multiple of 8) Word

WYnnn nnn=0-9984; (0 or Multiple of 8) Word

Internal Relay

Special Relay

Step Relay

Timer Present Value

WMnnnn nnnn=0-9984; (0 or Multiple of 8) Word

WMnnnn nnnn=0-9984; (Multiple of 8) Word

WSnnn

RTnnnn nnn=0-9984; (0 or Multiple of 8) Word nnnn=0-9999 Word

Counter Present Value

Data Register

RCnnnn

Rnnnnn nnnn=0-9999 nnnn=0-65534

32-bit Counter Present Value DRCnnn NNN=200-255

Word

Word

Word Data Register Dnnnnn nnnn=0-65534

**


Relay Type Format Range of the

Relay

Block

Input Relay

Output Relay

Internal Relay

Special Relay

Step Relay

Timer Flag

Counter Flag

Xnnnn

Ynnnn

Mnnnn

Mnnnn

Snnnn

Tnnnn

Cnnnn nnn=0-9999 nnn=0-9999 nnnn=0-9999 nnnn=0-9999 nnn=0-9999 nnn=0-9999 nnn=0-9999 e.g. X32(0 or Multiple of 8) e.g. Y8 (0 or Multiple of 8) e.g. M0 (0 ot Multiple of 8) e.g. M0 (0 or Multiple of 8) e.g. S16 (0 or Multiple of 8)

None

None

2. The illustration of the connection: PWS to RS232C of FB-MC type


413



Format PLC Setting PWS Setting


b.Station No 1

c.Transmission Speed 9600/19200 bps

COM1 or COM2 ==> RS232

1. Set PLC station 01 in ADP

1. Set SW5=OFF if parameters are set in ADP

2. Parameters are set in PWS.

d.Transmission Format 7-Bits, even,1-Bit

NOTE: Facon FB Series(RS232/RS485) for RS232 w/o RTS control (3-PIN cable) or

RS485 Facon FB Series(RS232-RTS) for S232 with RTS control (5-PIN cable, RTS,CTS with connect), not for RS485

414



9.10. Festo FPC


:Word


Register

Type

Input

Output

Format

IWnnn

QWnnn


nnn=0-255 nnn=0-255

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Counter CWnnn nnn=0-255

Register Rnnn nnn=0-255

Timer_Preset TPnnn nnn=0-255

Counter_Preset CPnnn nnn=0-255

Relay Type Format

Input Innn.bb


nnn=0-255; bb=0-15

Output

Flag

Qnnn.bb

Fnnnn.bb nnn=0-255; bb=0-15 nnnn=0-9999; bb=0-15

Timer Tnnn nnn=0-255

Counter Cnnn nnn=0-255

Timer_on TONnnn nnn=0-255

Timer_off TOFFnnn nnn=0-255


PWS-series to (TTL to RS232C cable)

PWS-series need to use a FESTO to provide TTL to RS232C cable, a 6-pin telephone connector with PLC-port and a 9-pin male with 9-pin female as below.

Block

b=0 e.g. I20.0 b=0 e.g. Q20.0 b=0 e.g. F20.0

None

None

None

None


415


3. Communication Format: Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the d ipswitch as b elow.



b.Station No None


d.Transmission Format 8-Bits, NONE, 1-Bit

PWS Setting

COM1 or COM2=RS232

416



9.11. Fuji NB


:


Register Type Format Range with the Register Data Size

Data Register

Special Register

Dnnn

Dnnnn

Timer Current Value TNnnn

Counter Current Value CNnn

Input Relay

Output Relay

Internal Relay

Latch Relay

Special Relay

WXnn

WYnn

WMnn

WLnn

WMnnn nnn=hex number 0-3ff Word nnnn=hex number 8000-80ff Word nnn=hex number 0-1ff nn=hex number 0-ff

Word

Word nn=hex number 0-1f nn=hex number 0-1f nn=hex number 0-3f nn=hex number 0-3f nnn=hex nuumber 800-81f

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Step Relay

Relay Type

Timer output

Counter output

Input Relay

Output Relay

Internal Relay

Latch Relay

Special Relay

Step Relay

WSnnn

Format

Tnnn

Cnn

Xnnn

Ynnn

Mnnn

Lnnn

Mnnnn

Snnn nnn=hex number 0-3f


Word

Block

nnn=hex number 0-1ff nn=hex number 0-ff nnn=hex number 0-1ff nnn=hex number 0-1ff

End with 0

End with 0

End with 0

End with 0 nnn=hex number 0-3ff nnn=hex number 0-3ff

End with 0

End with 0 nnnn=hex number 8000-81ff End with 0 nnn=hex number 0-3ff End with 0

2. The illustration of the connection: PWS to RS422 of NB/NS/NJ-CPU port


417


3. Communication Format: Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the dip-switch as below.



b.Station No None

c.Transmissiion Speed 19200 bps

d.Transmission Format 8-Bits,ODD,1-Bit

e.PLC password none or 0000-9999

PWS- Setting

COM= Dip-switch RS422

0000 or 9999= ****

418



9.12. GE Series 90 CCM



Register Type

Discrete Input

Discrete Output

Format

%Innnnn

%Qnnnnn

Range with the

Register

nnnnn=1-12288 nnnnn=1-12288

Data Size

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

**

Discrete Input (%Innnnn), Discrete Output (%Qnnnnn)

Address must be 1 or multiple of 16 +1.

Relay Type Block

Discrete Input

Discrete Output

Format Range with the

Relay

%Innnnn nnnnn=1-12288

%Qnnnnn nnnnn=1-12288

1 or multiple of 16 +1

1 or multiple of 16 +1


PWS-series to PLC





b.Station No 0



PWS Setting

COM1 or COM2=RS232


419


9.13. GE-Fanuc 90-SNP



Register Type Format Range with the Ragister Data Size

Discrete Inputs

Discrete Outputs

%Innnnn nnnnn=1-12288;1 or multiple of 16+1 Word

%Qnnnnn nnnnn=1-12288;1 or multiple of

16+1

Word

%Tnnn nnn=1-256; 1 or multiple of 16+1 Word Discrete

Temporaries

Discrete Internals

%SA Discretes

%SB Discretes

%SC Discretes

%S Discretes

Analog Inputs

%Mnnnnn nnnnn=1-12288;1 or multiple of

16+1

%SAnnn

%SBnnn nnn=1-128; 1 or multiple of 16+1 nnn=1-128; 1 or multiple of 16+1

%SCnnn nnn=1-128; 1 or multiple of 16+1

%Snnn nnn=1-128; 1 or multiple of 16+1

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Genius Global Data %Gnnnn nnnn=1-7680; 1 or multiple of 16+1 Word

Word

%AInnnn nnnn=1-8192 Word

Word Analog Outputs %AQnnnn nnnn=1-8192

**


Relay Type

Discrete Inputs

Discrete Outputs

Discrete

Temporaries

Discrete Internals

%SA Discretes

%SB Discretes

%SC Discretes

%S Discretes

Format Range with the Relay Block

%Innnnn nnnnn=1-12288

%Qnnnnn nnnnn=1-12288

%Tnnn nnn=1-256

%Mnnnnn nnnnn=1-12288

%SAnnn nnn=1-128

%SBnnn nnn=1-128

%SCnnn nnn=1-128

%Snnn nnn=1-128

Genius Global Data %Gnnnn nnnn=1-7680

** The HMI can read up to 800 bits in one read command.

1 or Multiple of 16+1








1 or Multople of 16+1

2. The illustration of the connection: a. PWS and RS232 of PLC miniconverter kit

420



b. PWS and RS422 of PLC 9030 CPU port

3. Communication Form parameters and the di at: Before connecti p-s witch as below. on, please set up the communication


a.Communication Format RS422 CPU PORT

Or RS232C

b.Station No


None

19200/9600 bps

d.Transmission Format 8-Bits;none,1-Bit

e.PLC ID blanks

f. PLC password none or ********

PWS Setting

COM2=RS232/422/485

1. RS422: Set SW10=OFF

00000000 or ********


421


9.14. Hitachi EC



Register Type

Internal Register

Internal Register

Internal Register

Format Range with the Register

WMnnn nnn=400, 402, 404, …, 654

WMnnn nnn=700, 702, 704, …, 954

WMnnn nnn=960, 962, 964, …, 990

Timer/Counter Register TCnnn nnn=100-195

Timer/Counter Register TCnnn nnn=200-295

** The HMI can read up to 60Words in one read command.

Relay Type

Input Relay

Output Relay

Auxiliary Relay

Timer/Counter Relay

Format

Xnnn

Ynnn

Mnnn

TCnn


nnn=0-15, 20-35, 40-55, 60-

75, , 180-195 nnn=200-215, 220-235, 240-

255, , 380-395 nnn=400-655, 700-955, 960-

991 nn=0-95

Data Size

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Block

X0,X20,X40

…

Y200,Y220…

M400,M420

…

TC0,TC1TC8

0

2. The illustration of the connection: PWS-series to PLC Program Console Port

3. Communication Form parameters and the di at: Before connection, please set up the communication p-s witch as b elow.

Format

PLC Setting


b.Station No.


None

9600 bps

PWS設定

COM1 or COM2 ==> RS232

1. Set SW5=OFF if parameters are set in the ADP

422



d.Transmission Format 7-Bits ,EVEN, 1- Bit 2. Set SW5=ON if parameters are set in the HMI

e. CTS Handshanking Enabled

** Using exclusive protocol must set PLC peripheral mode selector in COM2.


423


9.15. Hitachi H/EH1



Register Type

Ext. Input

Ext. Output

In t. Output

In t. Output

Int. Output

CPU Link

CPU Link

Format

WXnnnn

WYnnnn

WRnnnn

WRnnnn

WMnnn

WLnnn

WLnnnn

Range with the

Register

nnnn=0-4ff9 nnnn=0-4ff9 nnnn=0-c3ff n nnn=f0000-f1ff nnn=0-3ff nnn=0-3ff nnnn=1000-13ff

Data Size

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bi ts)

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bi ts)

Word(16 Bits)

T/C CV TCnnn nnn=0-511 Word(16 Bits)

**Hitachi H/EH1 Series must use pro

Hitachi EH2 Series must us cedure 1 protocol to communicate. e procedure 2 protoc ol to communicate.

E xt. Input (WXnnnn) and Ext. Output (WYnnnn) registers cannot access the

“R ead Block” function.

Relay Type Format Range with the Relay Block

Ext. Input Xmnnnn m=0-4, nnnn=0-ff95

None

Ext. Output Ymnnnn m=0-4, nnnn=0-ff95

None

Int. Output

Int. Output

CPU Link

Rnnn

Mnnnn

Lnnnn nnn=0-7ff nnnn=0-3fff nnnn=0-3fff

CPU Link

On-delay timer bit

Lnnnnn

TDnnn

Single-shot timer bit SSnnn

Up counter CUnnn

U/D counter up coil CTUnnn

U/D counter down coil CTDnnn

U/D counter contact CTnnn

T/C CV clear CLnnn

Rising edge DIFnnn nnnnn=10000-13fff nnn=0-255 nnn=0-255 nnn=0-511 nnn=0-511 nnn=0-511 nnn=0-511 nnn=0-511 nnn=0-511

Fallling edge DFNnnn nnn=0-511

**Ext. Input (WXnnnn) and Ext. Output (WYnnnn) cannot access the “Read

Block” function.

2. The illustration of the connection: a. PWS-series to PLC

424







b.Statiion No. None

c.Transmission Speed 19200 bps d.Transmission

Form at 7-B its, E VEN, 1-Bit

PWS Setting

COM1 or COM2=RS232


425


9.16. HUST CNC Controller

1. The data format and ran

Word Device and Bit evice. i the ADP can accress :


Register

nnnnn=0-65534

Data Size

16-bit Variable Wnnnnn Word(16 Bits)

32-bit Variable Dnnnnn nnnnn=0-65534 Double Word(32 Bits)

**It is up to 28 Variable be read one time.

Only write a variable once, so the speed is low.

16-bit Variable (Wnnnnn) : Only used in word object.

Only used in Bit0-Bit15 of each variable.

If write, Bit16-Bit31 will clear as 0.

32-bit Variable (Dnnnnn) : Only used in double word object.

Only used in Bit0-Bit31 of each variable.

Relay Type Format Range with the

Relay

Block

1-bit Variable

I - Bit Data

O - Bit Data

C - Bit Data

Bnnnnn.bb nnnnn=0-65534, bb must be 0 bb=0-31

Innn nnn=0-255

Onnn nnn=0-255 nnn must be 0 or multiple of 32. nnn must be 0 or multiple of 32.

Cnnn nnn=0-255 nnn must be 0 or multiple of 32.

S - Bit Data Snnn nnn=0-255 nnn must be 0 or multiple of 32.

A - Bit Data Annnn nnn=0-1023 nnn must be 0 or multiple of 32.

**I - Bit Data, O - Bit Data, C - Bit Data, S - Bit Data, A - Bit Data are read only. If write, then the action will be invalid.(No error messages)



426



3 . Communica tion Format: Bef ore conn ection, please set up the communic ation parameters a nd the dip-s witch as belo w.

Format

PLC Settin g

PWS Setting

a.Communication Format RS232 b.Station No. None

c.Transmission Speed 9 600 (1 9200 /38400) bps

d.Transmission Format 7 -Bits, EVEN , 2-Bits

COM1 or COM2=RS 232


427


9.17. IDEC MICRO-3



Register Type

Input Relay


Xn n=0-3

Data Size

Byte

Output Relay

Internal Relay

Shift Register

Timer Preset

Ti mer Current

Counter Preset

Counter Current

Data Register

Yn

Mnn

Rnn

TPnn

Tnn

CPnn

Cnn

Dnn n=0-3 nn=0-31 nn=0-48; must be 0 or multiple of 8 nn=0-31(read only) nn= 0-31 nn =0-31(read o nly) nn=0-31 nn=0-99

Byte

Byte

Bit

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Calender/CLOCK Wn n=0-6 Word


**Timer Preset and Counter Preset are read only. If the value of TP,CP exists in Data read.


Input Relay

Output Relay

Internal Relay

Shift Register

Timer Status

Counter Status

Xnb

Ynb

Mnnb

Rnn

Tnn

Cnn n=0-3; b=0-7 n=0-3; b=0-7 nn=0-31; b=0-7 nn=0-63 nn=0-31 read only nn=0-31 read only b=0 e.g. X10 b=0 e.g. Y00 b=0 e.g. M10 must be 0 or multiple of 8 must be 0 or multiple of 8

Must be 0 or multiple of 8.

**

The HMI can read up to 800 bits in one read command.

2. The illustration of the connection: PWS-to PLC PROGRAM Loader RS485

PORT(MICRO3-CPU PORT)

428



3 . Comm unication Format: B efore connection, please set up the communication paramete rs an d the d ip-swi tch as below.


a.Communicatio

n Forma t RS 485

b.Station No. 0-31；255

PWS Setting

COM2=RS232/422/485

1. RS485: Set SW10=ON

1. Set PLC Satio n 255 in ADP

c.Transmission Speed 9600bps

d.Transmission Format 7-Bits;EVEN; 1-Bit

e.C

TS Handshaking Disabled

**If only one PLC in background program, set the Station No . as 255 or sets as Network

Stati on No.


429


9.18. JETTER NANO_B



Register Type

User Register

User Register

Relay

Tupe

Format Range with the Relay

Block

I nput Relay Innbb

Out[ut Relay Onnbb

Flag Relay Fnnnn

Format

Rnnnnn

WRnnnnn

Range with the

Register

nnnnn=0-32767 nnnnn=0-32767

Data Size

DWord(32 Bits)

Word(16 Bits) nn=1 -16,b b=01-08 bb= 01 nn=1-16,bb=01-08 bb=01 nnnn=0-2 301 If nnn< of 24.

256, must be 0 or multiple

If nnn> 255 and <2048, must be multipl e of 24 +16.

If nnn>2047, must be multiple of

24+8.

2. The illustration of the connection: a. PWS-ser ies to P LC RS 232 P ORT (15-pin m ale) b . PWS-series to PLC RS232 PORT (9-pin male)




b.Station No. None


PWS Setting

COM1 or COM2=RS232

430





431


9.19. JETTER DELTA



Register Type

User Register

User Register

Fo rmat

Rnn nnn

WRnnnnn

R ange with the Register Data Size

nn nn=0-20479

21000-24999

31000-34999

41000-44999

50200-59999

61440-6 4999

DWord(32 Bits) nnnn=0-20479

21000-24999

31000-34999

41000-44999

50200-59999

61440-64999

Word(16 Bits)

Relay Type

Input Relay

Output Relay

Flag Relay


Block

Inbb

Onbb

Fnn nn n=1-8 ,bb=01-64 n=1-8,bb=01-64 nn n=0-2047 bb=01 bb=01 must be >255, and multip le of 24+16.

2. The illustration of the connection: a. b. PWS-series to PLC RS232 PORT (9-pin male)

432



3. Communication Format: Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the dip-switch as b elow.


a.C

ommunication Format RS232 C

b.Station No.


None

9600 bps


PWS Setting

COM1 or COM2=RS232


433


9.20. Klockner Moell er PS

1. The data fo rmat and range of the PLC registers which the ADP can accress :


Register Type

Word Marker

Relay Type

Format Range with the Register Data Size

MWnnnnn nnnnn=0-32766

**

The HMI can read up to 32Words in one read command.


Word

Block

Bit Marker0 Mnnnnn.b nnnnn=0-32766；b=0-7 b=0 e.g.

M10.0

**

The HMI can read up to 512 Bits in one read command.

2. The illustration of the connection: PWS-series to PLC RS232 Programming

PORT CPU ZB4-303-KB1


Format

PLC Setting


b.Station No. 0=PS4-201

1=PS316

c.Transmission Format 9600bps

d.Transmission Speed 1.Size 8-Bits

2.Parity None

3.Stop bit 1-Bit

PWS Setting

COM1or COM2=RS232

1. Set PLC Station 0/1 in ADP

1.Set SW5=OFF if parameters are set in ADP

2.Set SW5=ON if parameters are set in the HMI

434



9.21. KOYO SA/TI 325/330



Register Type

TMR/CTR

Accumulater

Register Values

Format

nnn

Range with the Register

nnn=octal number 60 0-677

Data Size

W ord mmm mmm=octal number 400-576; mmm must be a multiple of 2

Even Bytes

Relay Type

Input/Output Bits

Input/Output Bits

Internal Relay Bits

Shift Register Bits

Format

Bnnn

Bnnn

Bnnn

Bnnn


nnn=octal number 0-157 nnn=octal number 700-767 nnn=octal number 160-377 nnn=octal number 400-577

Block

End with 0

End with 0

End with 0

End with 0

TMR/CTR Bits Bnnn nnn=octal number 600-677 End with 0

* *When HMI ch anges a relay’s st a te, the HMI must read 1 byte (8 rela ys).

After change t m he correspongin ore than one P g bit , t

LC sca hen the H M d

I will write the byte in PLC. These act f b ions w n. PLC la der cannot control other bit(relay) o yte bef ill take ore the

H MI compeleted “Change the Relay”;otherwise, these bit(relay) will retrun to initial v w alue. In other w ants to chang e ords, th

B3’s sta e control te, it w ill ac

re tion of PLC will be resume ad B0-B7. After the corre d. For exam ple,if the HMI sponding bit B3 is cahnged, t he HMI will w rite the B yte to PLC . The PLC ladder’s comm and will be canceled afte r the HMI writes the changes in.

2 . The i llustration of the conne ctio n:PWS-series to PLC RS2 32C PORT of SA21

##

KOYO SA21 series E02-DM and TI305-02DM have the same wiring.



a.Communication Format RS422 or RS232C

b.Station No. None

c.Tranmission Speed 9600/19200 bps

PWS Setting

COM2=RS232/422/485


435


d.Transmission Format 8-Bits, odd, 1-Bit

e.Operation Mode RUN Mode

ASCII mode.sw2-8=ON f.mm. Mode

436



9.22. KOYO DIRECT DL /KOYO SU Series/TI435



Register Type Format R ange with the Re gister Data Size

Timer Accumulated Vnnn

Counter

Accumulated

V Memory

Link Relays

Input Status

Output Status

Vnnnn nn nn=octal number 1400 -777 7

Vnnnnn

Vnnnnn nn nnn=octal num ber40400-4 0423

Vnnnnn nn nn nn n=octal number 0-177 number -117 7 Word nnn=octal number400 nnn=octal numb

00-4 er40500-4

0037

0523

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Control Relays Vnnnnn nnnnn=octal number40600-40635 Word

Timer Status

Counter Status

Spec. Relay 1

Spec. Relay 2

Relay Type

Input Status

Outpuut Status

C ontrol Relays

Sta ge

Tim er Status

Counter Status

Spec. Relay 1

Sp ec. Relay 2

Li nker Relays

Vnnnnn nnnnn=octal number41100-41107

Vnnnn n nnnnn=octal number41140 -41 147

Vnnnnn nnnnn=octal number412 00-41 205

Vnnnnn nnnnn=octal number41216-41230


Xnnn

Ynnn

Cnnn

Snn n nnn=octal number 0-477 nnn=octal n nn umber 0-477 n=octal number 0-737 nnn=octal number 0-577

Tnnn nnn=octal number 0-177

CTnnn nnn=octal number 0-177

SPnnn nnn=octal number 0-137

SPnnn nnn=octal number 320-617

GXnnn nnn=octa l number 0-777

2. The illustration of the c onnection:PWS to PLC RS2 32C PORT a. PWS to PLC RS232C PORT

Word

Word

Word

Word

Block

End with 0

End with 0

End with 0

End with 0

End with 0

End with 0

End with 0

End w ith 0

End with 0


437


b. PWS to PLC (cpu240) RS232C PORT

3 . Communic ation Form at: Be fore co parameter s and the dip -swit ch as b nnection, p elow. lease set up the comm unicatio n

Format

a.Transmission Format

b. Station No.



e.Comm. Protocol Mode

PLC Setting

RS2 32C

01

9600 bps

1.Size

：

8 -Bits

PWS Setting

COM2=RS232/422/485

2.Parity：not none;ODD

3.Stop Bit：1-Bit

IS

438



9.23. LG GLOFA GM6




Register

Input Image

Input Image

Output Image

Output Image

%IWn.m.b

%IDn.m.b

%QWn.m.b

%QDn.m.b

Internal memory %MWnnnn n=0-1, m=0-7, b=0-3 n=0-1, m=0-7, b=0-1 n=0-1, m=0-7, b=0-3 n=0-1, m=0-7, b=0-1 nnnn=0-40 95

Data Size

Word(16 Bits)


Word(16 Bits)


Word(16 Bits)

Internal memory %MDnnnn nnnn=0-65534 Double Word(32 Bits)

**

The HMI can read up to 60 words(30 double words) in one read/write command and onl y support CPU module.

Relay T ype Forma t Range with the Relay Block

Input Image %IXn.m.bb n=0-1, m=0-7, bb= 0-63

Output Image %QXn.m

.bb n=0 -1, m=0-7, bb= 0-63

Internal memory %MXnn nnn nnnnn=0-20 47 bb must be 0 or multiple of 16 bb must be 0 or multiple of 16 n. must be 0 or multiple of 16

2. The illustration of the connection: a. PWS-series to PLC b. PWS-series to PLC RS232 PORT (9-pin male)



a.Communication Format RS232 (RS422/RS485) COM1 or COM2=RS232

(RS422/RS485)

b.Station No. 0

c.Transmission Speed 19200 (9600 /38400) bps



439


440



9.24. LG K10/60H/200H



Register Type

Auxiliary Relay

Input/Output Relay

Keep Relay

Link Relay

Special Relay

Timer Current Value

Counter Current

Value

Timer Set Value

Counter Set Value

Mnn

Pnn

Knn

Lnn nn=0 nn=0

-63

-15 nn=0-31 nn=0-31

Fnn

Tnnn nn=0 nnn=

-15

0-255

Cnnn nnn= 0-255

TSnnn

CSnnn nnn= 0-255 nnn= 0-255

Data Register Dnnnn nnnn=0-1023

**

The HMI can read up to 60 word in one read command

Relat Type

Format Ran ge with the Regi ster

Format Ran ge with the Relay

Auxiliary Relay

Input/Output Relay

Keep Relay

Link Relay

Special Relay

Ti mer Relay

Mnnb

Pnnb

Knnb

Lnnb

Fnnb

Tnnn nn=0-63; b=hex number0-f nn=0-15; b=hex number0-f nn=0-31; b=hex number0-f nn=0-31; b=hex number0-f nn=0-15; b=hex number0-f nnn=0-255

Counter Relay Cnnn nnn=0-255

Data Size

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Block

End with b=0

End with b=0

End with b=0

End with b=0

End with b=0



2. The illustration of the connection:PWS-series to the RS-232 Port of K200H CPU


441


3 . Comm unication Forma parameters a nd the dipt: Before switch as connec

below tion, please s

: et up the comm unication

Format

PLC Setting


b.Station No. 00

c.Transmission Speed 960 0 bps

d.Transmission Format 8-B its,NON E,1-Bit

PWS Setting

COM1/COM2=RS232

1. Set t he SW5=OFF if

pa ram eters are set i n ADP

2. Set t he SW=ON if pa rame ters are set in the HMI

442



9.25. LG K200S

1.

The data format and range of the PLC registers which the ADP can accress :


Register Type

I/O RELAY

AUX RELAY

Keep RELAY

Link RELAY

Special RELAY

Format

PWnn

MWnnn

KWnn

LWnn

FWnn

Range with the

Register

nn=0-15 nnn=0-191 nn=0-31 nn=0-63 nn=0-63

Data Size

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Data Register

Relay Type

I/O RELAY

AUX RELAY

Keep RELAY

Link RELAY

Special RELAY

DWnnnn

Format

Pnnb

Mnnnb

Knnb

Lnnb

Fnnb nnnn=0-9999 Word(16 Bits)

Range with the Relay Block

nn=0-15, b=0-f nnn=0-191, b=0-f nn=0-31, b=0-f nn=0-63, b=0-f nn=0-63, b=0-f b must be 0 b must be 0 b must be 0 b must be 0 b must be 0

2. The illustration of the connection:





b.Station No. None


d.Transmission Format 8-Bits, NONE, 1-But

PWS Setting

COM1 or COM2=RS232


443


444



9.26. LG K300S




I/O Relay

AUX Relay

Ke ep Relay

Lin k Relay

Special Relay

Timer

Counter

Step controller

Data Register

Relay Type

Format

PWnn

MWnnn

KWnn

LWnn

F Wnn

T Wnnn

CWnnn

S Wnnnn

DWnnnn

Foramt

I/O Relay

AUX Relay

Keep Relay

Link Relay

Special Relay

PWnnb

M Wnnnb

K Wnnb

LWnnb

FWnnb



Range with the

Register

nn= 0-31 nnn = 0-191 nn = 0-31 n n = 0-63 nn = 0-63 nnn = 0-255 nnn = 0-255 nnnn = 0-999 9 nnnn = 0-999 9

Range with the

Relay

nn= 0-31 b=0-f nn = 0 -31 b=0-f nn = 0-63 b=0-f nn = 0-63 b=0-f

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bi ts)

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bit s)

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Block


Format

PLC Setting

a.Transmission Format RS232C

b.Station No. RS232C=0

c.Transmission Speed RS232C=9600 bps

d.Transmission Format RS232C =8 Bits,none,1 Bit

PWS Setting


445


9.27. LG Master-K10S/K30S/60S/100S



Register Type

I/O RELAY

AUX RELAY

Keep RELAY

Link RELAY

Special RELAY

Format

PW n

MWnn

KWnn

LW nn

Range with the

Register

n=0-5 nn=0-31 nn=0-15 nn=0-15 nn=0-15

Data Size

Wor d(16 Bits)

Wor d(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Dat a Register

Relay Type

DWnnn nn nn=0-255 Word(16 Bits)

I/O RELAY

AUX RELAY

Keep RELAY

Link RELAY

Special RELAY

Tim er

Counter

Format

Pnb

Mnnb

Knnb

Lnnb

Fnnb

Tnnn

Cnnn

Range with the

Relay

n=0-5, b=0-f nn=0-31, b=0-f nn=0-15, b=0-f nn=0-15, b=0-f nn=0-15, b=0-f nnn=0-12 7 nnn=0-127

Block

b must be 0 b must be 0 b must be 0 b must be 0 b must be 0 n.. must be 0 or multiple of

16 n.. must be 0 or multiple of

16

2. T he illustration of the connection:


3. Communication Format: Before connection, please set up the communication param eters and the dip-switch as below:

Format

PLC Setting

446


PWS Setting

a.Transmission Format

b.Station No.

RS232

None



8-Bits, NONE, 1-Bit


COM1 or COM2=RS232


447


9.28. MATSUSHITA FP



Register

Type

Format Range with the

Register

Device Type /

Aux.Address

Block ead

R/W

Internal Relay WRnn

Special Internal

Relay nn=0-97(875)

WRnnn nnn =90 0-910

0

1

Link Relay WLnnn nn n=0127(639) 2

External Input WXnnn nnn=0-127(255) 3

Relay

0

0

0

Word

Word

0 Word

External Output

Relay

WYnnn nn n=0127(255)

Timer/Counter EVn nn nn n=0254(2047)

P.V.

4

5 0 Word

Timer/Counter SVn n

S.V.

Data Register DTnnnn nnnn=0 -2047 (32764) 7

Special Data

Register

DTnn n n nnn n=9 000-9255 8

Link Data

Register

6 0 Word

0 Word

0 Word

LDnnn nnn=0-127(8447) 9 0 Word

File Register FLnnnn n nnn n=0 -8191

(32764)**

** The HMI can read up to 27 word in one read command.

**The Register setting range of FP10SH is nnnnn=0- 32764.

Relay Type Format Range with the Relay Block

Internal Relay

Special Internal Relay

Link Relay

External Input Relay

External Output Relay

Timer Flag Contact

Rnnn b

Rnnn b

Lnnnb

Xnnn b

Ynnnb

Tnnn

Counter Flag Contact Cnnn nn=0-97(875);b= 0-f nnn=900-910;b= 0-f nnn=0 -127(639);b=0-f nnn=0 -127(255);b=0-f nnn=0-127(255);b=0-f nnn=0-254(2047) nnn=0-254(2047) b=0 e.g. R1230 b=0 e.g. R9100 b=0 e.g.. L110 b=0 e.g. X00 b=0 e.g. Y00 must be 0 or multiple of16 must be 0 or multiplr of 16


**The Relay setting range of FP10SH is nnnn=0-2047.

2 . T he illustration of the connection: a. PWS-series to PLC RS232C LINK of FP3 CCU or FP1 LINK PORT

448



b. PWS-series to PLC RS422 of PROGRAM PORT ( FP3 CPU PORT)


Format

a.Communication

Format

b.Station No.

PLC Setting

RS422 or RS232C

PWS Setting

COM2=RS232/422/485

02-27

FP CPU PORT =238

FP1: Set computer link

c.Transmission Speed 19200/9600 bps

FP10SH –CPU: Set115.2K bps

d.Transmission Format Size 8-Bits,odd, 1-Bit

1. Set PLC Station 01 in ADP,

CPU

PORT 238

1. Set SW5=OFF if parameters are

set in ADP

2. Set SW=ON if parameters are

set in the HMI


449


9.29. MIRLE DX




IR area

DM area

Relay Type

IR area

Format

IRn nn

DM nnnn

Range with the

Register

nnn=0-111 nnnn=0-2367


IRnnnbb nnn=0-111,bb=00-15

2 . The illust ration of the c onnecti on: a . PWS to MIRLE DX RS42 2 P ORT

W ord

Wo rd

Block

bb=00 b . PWS to MIRLE SB C 20 RS42 2 PORT c. PWS to MIRLE NDX RS232

450



3 . Communication Forma t: Before con nection parameters and the dip-switch as below:

, please set up the com munication


a.Communication Format RS232C/ RS422 b.Station No. 0

COM2=R S232/42 2

1. Set PLC Station 00 in ADP


2.NDX —8 Bits,NONE,

Bit

1 Stop

d.Transmission Format 1.DX,SBC20—8 Bits,ODD,1 1 Set SW5=ON if parameters

Stop Bit are set in the HMI


451


9.30. Mitsubishi FX

1. The data format and e of the PLC regis ic

W rang ord Device and Bit De vice.

Register Type Format Range with the Register Data Size

Auxiliary Relay

Special Auxiliary

Relay

Status Relay

Mn

Mn nnn nnn nnnn=0-3071; must be 0 or multiple of 8 nnnn=8000-8255; must be 0 or multiple of 8

Byte

Byte

Input Relay

Output Relay

Snnn

Xnnn

Ynnn nnn=0-999; must be 0 or multiple of

8

Timer PV Tnnn nnn=0-254

16-位元 Counter PV Cnnn nnn=0-199

Byte nnn=octal number 0-377; end with 0 Byte nnn=octal number 0-377; end with 0 Byte

Word

Word

32-位元 Counter PV

Cnnn nnn=200-255 DWord

Data Register Dnnn nnn=0-1023(7999) D1000=FILE

REGISTER

Special Data Register Dnnnn nnnn=8000-8255


Relay Type Format Range with the Type

Word

Word

Block

Auxiliary Relay

Special Auxiliary

Relay

Status Relay

Input Relay

Output Relay

Timer Flag

Counter Flag

Mnnnn

Mnnnn

Snnn

Xnnn

Ynnn

Tnnn

Cnnn

0-3071

8000-8255

0-999

Octal number 0-377

Octal number 0-377

0-255

0-255

Must be 0 or multiple of 8



End with 0

End with 0




2. The illustration of the connection: a. PWS to RS422 of PLC-FX2 CPU

452



b. PWS- to PLC PROGRAM Loader PORT (Mitsubishi FX2n/FX0n CPU

PORT)

3 . Communica tion Forma t: Be fore con nection, plea se set up the communicatio n parameter s and the dipswit ch as bel ow:

Format

a.Communication Format

b.Transmission Speed

c.Transmission Format

PLC Setting

RS4 22

9600 bps

7-Bits ,EVEN ,1-Bit

PWS Setting


453


9.31. Mitsubishi A

1 . The data fo rmat and ran ge of the PL


C registers which the A DP can accress :

Register Type Format R ange with the Re gister

Input Relay

Output Relay

Link Relay

Internal Relay

Special Relay

Latch Relay

Annunciator

Timer PV

Counter PV

Data Register

Special Register

File Register

Link Register

Xnnn

Ynnn

Bnnn

Mnnnn

Mnnnn

Lnnnn

Fnnnn

TNnnn

CNnnn

Dnnnn

Dnnnn

Rnnnn

Wnnn nnn=hex number 0-7ff; end with 0 nn n=hex number 0-7ff; en d with 0 nn n=hex number 0-fff; end with 0

Word

Word nn nn=9000 of 16

-9255;-9000 must be multiple

Word n nnn=0-8191; must be 0 o le Word

Word nn nn=0-20 47; must be 0 or multiple of 16 Word nn nn=0-20 47; must be 0 or multiple of 16 Word n nn=0-999 n nn=0-999 n nnn=0-81 91 n nnn=9000 -9255 nnnn =0-81 91 nn n=hex nu mber 0-fff

Peripherial Input Relay PXnnn nn n=0-7ff m ust be 0 or multiple of 16


Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Relay Type Format Range with the Relay

Block

Data

Size

Input Relay

Output Relay

Lin k Relay

Inte rnal Relay

Special Relay

Latch Relay

Annunciator

Timer Contact

Timer Coil

Xnnn

Ynnn

Bnnn

Mnnnn

Mnnnn

Lnnnn

Fnnnn

TSnnn

TCnnn hex number 0-7ff hex number 0-7ff hex number 0-fff

0-8191

9000-9255

0-2047

0-2047

0-999

0-999

End with 0

End with 0

End with 0


The last 3 digits must be multiple of

16.





454


Counter Contact

Counter Coil

CSnnn

CCnnn

Peripherial Input Relay PXnnn

0-999

0-999

0-7ff



Must be 0 ot multiple

Of 16.


** The HMI can read up to512 bits in one read command.

2. The illustration of the connection: a. PWS and PLC AJ71UC24-R2/S8 b. PWS and PLC AJ71UC24 RS422


455


c. PWS,PLC AnA and AnA/AnS/AnU CPU port RS422

3. Communication Format: Before co parameters and the dip-switch as be nnection, please set up the communication low:


a.Communication Format RS422 or RS232C

AJ71UC24 sw1=ON RS422

sw1=Off

b.Station No.

RS232

00(CPU PORT)

PWS Setting

COM2=RS232/422/485


1. Set PLC station 00


00(AISJ71C24-S3)

00-31(AJ71UC24)

9600/19200 bps

CPU PORT=9600bps

Set PWS station 255


e.Comm. Protocol Format 1;5;A

f.Check Sum YES

g.Write during Run Allowed

**For AISJ71C24 or AJ71c24, set the HMI staion no. as 255 and PLC station no. as 0 an d connect with PLC CPU port. To communicate in COM2, please set the DIP switch = off and communication parameters as 9600,8,0DD,1.

456



9.32. Mitsubishi QnA



Register Type Format Range with the Register Da ta

Size

Link Relay

Counter Coil

Counter Current Value

Counter Contact

Data Register

Direct Input

Direct Output

Annunciator

Latch Relay

Internal Relay

Bn

CCn

CNn

CSn

Dn

DXn

DYn

Fn

Ln

Mn n=hex number 0-1fff ; end with 0 n=0-1023; mus t be 0 and multiple of

16.

n=0-1023

Wo rd

Word

W ord

of Wo rd

16. n=0-12287 n=hex number 0-1fff ; end with 0

Word

Word n=0-204 7; m ust be 0 or multiple of

16

Word

Word n=0-8191; must be 0 or multiple of

16

Word n=0-8191; must be 0 or multiple of Word

16

File Register

Step Relay

Special Link Relay

Re tentive Timer Coil

Special Register

Special Relay

Rn

Sn

SBn

SCn

SDn

SMn n=0-32767 n=hex number 0-7ff ; end with 0 n=0-2047; must be 0 or multiple of

16

Word n=0-8191; must be 0 or multiple of Word

16

Word

Word n=0-2047 n=0-2047; must be 0 or multiple of

16

SNn n=0-2047

Word

Word

Word Retentive Timer

Current Value

Retentive Timer

Contact

SSn

Special Link Register SWn

Timer Coil TCn n=0-2047; must be 0 or multiple of

16 n=hex number 0-7ff

Word

Word

Word

Timer Current Value

Timer Contact

TNn

TSn n=0-2047; must be 0 or multiple of

16 n=0-2047 Word

Word

Edge Relay Vn n=0-2047; must be 0 or multiple of

16 n=0-2047; must be 0 or multiple of

16

Word

Lin k Register

In put Relay

Wn

Xn n=hex number 0-1fff n=he x number 0-1fff ; end with 0

Wo rd

Word


457


Output Relay

Index Register

File Register

Relay Type

Link Relay

Counter Coil

Counter Contact

Direct Input

Direct Output

Yn

Zn

ZRn

Format

Bn

CCn

CSn

DXn

DYn n= hex numbe r 0-1fff ; end with 0 n=0-15 n hex nu mbe r 0-fe7f


hex number 0-1ffff

0-1023

0-1023 n=hex number 0-1fff n=hex number 0-1fff

Block

Word

Word

Wo rd

Latch Relay

Internal Relay

Step Relay

Special Link Relay

Retentive Timer Coil

Special Relay

Retentive Timer

Contact

Timer Contact

Timer Coil

Edge Relay

Input Relay

Output Relay

Ln

Mn

Sn

SBn

0-8191

0-8191

0-8191 n=hex number 0-7ff

SCn

SMn

0-2047

0-2047

SSn 0-2047

TSn

TCn

Vn

Xn

Yn

0-2047

0-2047

0-2047 hex number 0-1fff hex number 0-1fff

2. The illustration of the connection: a. PWS and QnA CPU port (RS232)

HMI-COM port

25-pin

PLC-port RS232C

------CABLE-----6-pin

RXD

TXD

GND

RTX

CTX

3

2

7

4

5

2

1

3

5

6 b. PWS and Q Series C24 (RS232)

TXD

RXD

GND

CTS

RTS

458


HMI-COM port

25-pin ------CA

PLC-port RS232C

BLE-----9-pin


R XD 3

TXD 2

GND 7

RTX 4

CTX 5

3 TXD

2 RXD

5

GND

1

CD

4 D TR c . PWS and Q Series C24 (RS422)

3. Communication Format: Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the dip-switch as be low:

Format

b.Station No.

PLC Setting

a .Communication Format RS422 or RS232C

00(CPU PORT)

PWS Setting

COM2=RS232/422/485


00(Q Series C24)

19200 bps

Set PLC Station 00

d.T

ransmission Format 8-Bits,ODD,1-Bit

(CPU PORT)

7-Bits,EVEN,2-Bits

(Q Series C24)


459


9.33. Modbus slave

1. The data format and rang

Word Device and Bit De vice.

r isters which the ADP can accress :


Register

Data Size

REGISTER W nnnnn=0-65535


2. The illustration of the connection: a. PWS-series to PLC b. PWS-series to PLC RS232 PORT (9-pin male)


Format

PLC Setting

B. PWS Setting

a.Communication Format RS232 (RS422/RS485) COM1 or COM2=RS232

(RS422/RS485)

b.Station No.

c.Transmission Speed 9600 bps (9600-115200)

d.Transmission Format 8-bits, NONE, 1-bit

(7), (EVEN/NONE), (2)

460



9.34. Modicon PC984 or Modbus(Ascii)or TSX Quantum



Register Type

Input Registers (Modicon

984/Modb us (Ascii))

PC

Format Range with the Register Data

Size

nnnnn nnnnn=300 01-39999(s lave) Wo rd

3 0001-31024(m aster)

Output Registers (Modico n PC


Input Registers (TSX Quantum ) nnnnn nnnnn=4 0001-49999(a s rd

4 0001-41024(a s master) n nnnnn nnnnn=300 001-365535 Wo rd

Wo rd Output Registers (TSX Quantu m) n nnnnn nnnnn=400 001-465535

* * The HM I can read up to 125Words in on e read command.


Discrete Outputs (M odic on PC

984/Modbus (Ascii))

Discrete Inputs (Modico n PC


Nnnnn nnnnn=1-4999(slave)

1-10 24( master)

Nnnnn nnnnn=10001-19999(slave)

1 0001-1 1024(master)

Nnnnn nn 0 Discrete Outputs(TSX Quantum)

Discrete Inputs (TSX Quantum) Nnnnn nn 1

** The HMI can read up to 2000bits in one read command.

**M odubus (Ascii) master – V2 as Mo dubus (Ascii) master. In functional way,it will infor m the connected contro ller automatically when the HMI data is changed.

2. The illustration of the connection:PWS series to RS232 of PLC CPU port

3. Communic ation Format: Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the dip-switch as below:


461




PWS Setting

COM1/COM2=RS232

b.Station No.


1

1. Set PLC Station 01 in ADP

01—247 (mem setup)

19200/9600 bps

d.Transmission Format 8, EVEN ,1

(7,O,1);(7,E,1);(7,E,2)

(8,E,1);(8,O,1);(8,N,1) RTU MODE

462



9.35. OMRON C



Register

Type

IR area

Format Range with the Register Block read

HR area

AR area

LR area

TC area

DM area

IRnnn

HRnn

ARnn

LRnn

TCnn n nnn= 0-511 nn=0 -99 nn= 0-27 nn=0-63

DMnn nn nnn n=06655

Word( 16

Bits)

Word( 16

Bits)

Word( 16

Bits)

Word(16

Bit

W ord (16

Bits)

Word(16

Bits)

Max.

28

Max.

28

Max.

28

Max. 28

Max . 28

Max. 28


IR area

HR area

AR area

LR area

TC area

IRnnnbb nnn=0-511; bb=00-15

HRnnbb nn=0-99 ; bb=00-15

ARnnbb nn=0-27 ; bb=00-15

LRnnbb nn=0-63 ; bb=00-15

TCnnn nnn=0-511

2. The illustration of the connection: a. PWS-series to PLC RS232C HOST LINK of LK201/

C200HS/C28H/C40H/CQM1

Block

bb=00 e.g. IR12300 bb=00 e. g.HR2300 bb=00 e.g. AR100 bb=00 e.g. LR2300

Multiple of 16 e.g.

TC16


463


b.

PWS-series to PLC RS422 HOST LINK of C200H-LK202



a.Communication Format RS232C/ RS422/ RS485 COM2=RS232/422/485

b.Station No. 00(00-31) 1. Set PLC station 00 in ADP

1.CQM1-CPU21


DM6648=0000

19200/9600 bps

1.CQM1-CPU21

d.Tranmission Format

e.Operation Mode

f.PROTOCOL

DIP-sw5=OFF

Initial value 7-bits, ENEN, 2

Monitor Mode

Multiple-Link

464



9.36. Omron CS1



Register Type

IR Area (CIO Are a)

HR Area

AR Area

LR Area

TC Area

DM Area

EM Area

Relay Type

IR Area (CIO Are a)

HR Area

LR Area

Timer Area

Counter Area

Format

IRnn nn

HRnnn

ARnnn

LRn nn

TCn nnn

DMn nnn

EMm.nnnnn

Format

IRnnnnb

LRnnnb

Tnnnn

Cnnnn

R ange with th e

Register

nnnn=0-6143 nnn=0-511 nnn=0-959

99 nn=0-9 999

Data Size

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Word( 16 Bits)

Word (16 Bits)

Word (16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)


5 nnn=0-199, b=00-15 nn 0 nnnn=0-2047 bb must be 00 bb must be 00 bb must be 00

2. The ill ustration of the c onne ction: a. PWS

-series

to PLC



465


3. Communi p arame c ation Format: Before connectio ters and the dip-switch as below: n, ple ase set up the communication

Format PLC Setting PWS Seting

a.Communica

tion Format RS232 (RS422 /RS48 5) C M2 RS232

(RS422/RS485)

b.S

c.Tr

tation No. 0 (0-31) ansmission Speed 9 600 bps

d.Transmission Format 7-Bits, EVEN, 2-Bits

466



9.37. Omron CV



Register Type

CIO Area

TC Area

TC Area

AR Area

DM Area

Relay Typ e

CIO Area

TC Area

TC Area

Format

CIOnnn n

TCn nnn

TCnn nn

ARnnn

DMnnnn

Range with the

Register

nnnn=0-2555 nnnn=0 -1023 nnnn=2 048-3071 nnn=0-511 nnnn =0-999 9

Data Size

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 B its)

Word(1 6 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Format

CIOnnnnbb

TCnnnn

TCnnnn


nnnn=0-2555, bb=00-15 nnnn=0-1023 nnnn=2048-3071 bb must be 00

2 . The illustratio n of the connection: a .

PWS-series to PLC



467


3. Communication Form parameters and the d at: Before con ip-switch as be nection, please set up the communication low:


a.Communication Form at RS232

b.Station No. 0


7-Bits, EVEN, 2-B its d.Transmission Format

B. PWS Setting

COM1 or CO M2=RS232

468



9.38. Parker 6K



I nput

O utput

U

B

N

Register Type

ser Status inary umeric

Command Fo rmat Range with D the Register a ta Size D ata Range

!n

TIN In n = 0 ~ 8

Dou ble

Wor d

!n

TOUT On n = 0 ~ 8

Dou ble Wo rd

A

A

S larm Statu xis Status s !I

ystem Status

NTHW

!n

TAS

Asn

AX Sn n = 1 n = 1 ~ 8

Dou ble Wo rd

Dou ble Wo rd

!T

SS SY Sn

Doub le Wo rd

!T

US US Sn

Wor d

!V

ARBnn n VA

RBnnn nnn

= 001~125

Dou ble Wo rd

!V

ARnn n VA Rnnn nnn =

Dou ble Wo rd

+-999,999,999

I nteger !V

ARInn n VAR Innn nnn = 001~225 Dou ble Wo rd +-2 ,147,483, 647

S tring

Motor Position !nTPC

Motor V elocity

!V

!nTVEL

A 10 Words

MO Pn n = 1 ~ 8

Double

Word

MOVn n = 1 ~ 8

Double Word

0 ~ 20

Characters

+-

2,147,483,647

!n

TPE EN Pn n = 1 ~ 8

Double Wo rd

Encoder

Position

TIMER !TTIM Tn =

Double Word

0 ~ 999999999

Nnn

Run

Program

Nnn nn = 1 ~ 50

10 Words 0 ~ 20

Characters

**If

*

Paker 6K still excute, it will cau

*Parker 6K ne eds to write inte rnal se communication Tim

program in order to acc e Out . ept the comm and with initial c ode '!', or it m ay cau se comm unica tion error.

Register

Type

Com mand Format Ran ge with the Re gister Data

Range

Input

Output

Alarm

Status

!nTI

N

!nTOUT

!INTHW

In.

bb

On.bb

ASn.bb

n = 0 ~ 8

n = 0 ~ 8

n = 1 bb = 1~32 bb =1~32 bb =1~32

Bit

Bit

Bi t

Axis Status !nTAS AXSn.bb n = 1 ~ 8 bb =1~32 Bit

System

Status

Binary

!TSS

User Status !TUS

SYSn.bb

USSn.bb

n = 1

n = 1 bb =1~32 Bit bb =1~16 Bit

!VARBnnn

VARBnnn.bb nnn = 001~125 bb =1~32

Bit


469


Register

Type

Command Format

Error Status TERn.bb

RUN

TERn.bb

Run Program RUNnn



Range with the Register Data

Range

n = 1 bb =1~32 Bit

nn = 1 ~50 Bit

3. Communication Format: parameters and the dip-s

Before connection, witch as below: t



b.Station No. None


d.Transmission Foramt 8-Bits, NONE, 1-Bit

PWS Setting

COM1 or COM2=RS232

470



9.39. SIDE MIDA 20/20D



Register Type

Register

Format

Wnnnnn

Range with the

Register

nnnn = 0-10499

Data Size

Word(16 Bits)

1 0


I/O Relay Bnnn

Hardware Reset

Software Reset

Clear RAM,EEPROM

Cl ear database

Clear RAM,EEPROM, database

Cle ar RAM,EEPROM, data and default setup base

HardRn

SoftRn

Clr0-n

Clr1-n

Clr2-n


Range with the

Relay

nnn= 0-1599

Block

n= 0 n= 0 n= 0 n= 0 n= 0

Must be 0 or multiple of16 b. PWS-series to PLC RS485 PORT


471


3. Communication Format: Before connecti on, please set up the communication parameters and the dip-switch as below:

Format

a.Communication

Format

PLC Setting

RS 232C

RS 485

PWS Setting

RS232C : use SIDE MIDA 2 0/20D driver

RS485 :use MODBUS SLAVE driver


RS485=1

c.Transmission Speed RS232C=9600 b ps

R S485 =9 600 bp s

d.Transmission Format RS232C =7 bits,n one,1 bit

RS 485 = 8 bits,e ven,1 bit e.Mode RS 232C= stop mo de

RS485 =running mode

RS232C=153

RS485 =1

472



9.40. Simatic S5



Register Type Format

Input Image

Output Image

Extended I/O

Flag 位元s

Range of the Register

IBnnn

QBnnn nnn=0-127 nnn=0-127

OBnnn nnn=0-8191

FBnnn nnn=0-8191

Data Size

Byte

Byte

Byte

Max. 30

Max. 30

Max. 30

Pe ripheral I/O PBnnn

System Data Area RSnnn

System Data Area RInnn

System Data Area RJnnn

System Data Area RTnnn

Timer Current Tnnn

Counter Current Cnnn

Data Block nnn=0-8191 nnn=0-255 nnn=0255 nnn=0-255 nn n=0-255 nnn=0-25 5 nnn=0-255

Byte

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

DBmm /nnn

DBnnn mmm=0-255; mmm is Block number

nnn=0-65535; nnn is the numbers which defines block. If the mmm not set the numbers, the numbers of mmm is 3=

DB3/nnn

Max . 30

Max. 30

Max. 30

M ax. 30

Max.

30

Max. 30

Max. 30

M ax. 30

Data Block DWmmm/nnn

DWnnn mmm=0-255; mmm is Block number

nnn=0-32767; nnn is the numbers which defines block. If the mmm not set the numbers, the numbers of mmm is 3=

DW3/nnn


Relay Type Format Range of the Relay

Max. 30

Block

Input Image

Output Image

Extended I/O

Flag 位元s

IBnnn.b

QBnnn.b

OBnnn.b

FBnnn.b nnn=0-127; b=0-7 nnn=0-127; b=0-7 nnn=0-255; b=0-7 nnn=0-255; b=0-7 b=0 e.g. IB30.0 b=0 e.g. QB2.0 b=0 e.g. OB0.0 b=0 e.g. FB23.0

Peripheral I/O PBnnn.b nnn=0-255; b=0-7 b=0 e.g. PB23.0

2. The illustration of connection: You must useRS-232/Current-loop convert cable.

PWS-30XX(OLD MODEL) provides 20mA current-loop to connect.PWS-12xx, PWS-

17xx,PWS700, PWS-31xx and PWS-37Xx do not provide 20mA current-loop.


473


3. Communication Format: Before connecti on, please set up the communication parameters and the dip-switch as below:


a.Communication Form at 20m A CURR ENT LOOP PWS-30xx/PW S-21x x

RS-232/Cur rent-loop S232 converter

b.Station No.


None

9600 bps PLC. MODE CODE

0: 90U 1: 95U

2:100U 3:102U 4:103U

5:115U 6:1 35U/921

7:135U/922 8:135U/928

d.Transmission Format 8-bits, EVEN ,1-bit

e.PLC Mode Code PLC’s Data Block

n=3～255 must OPEN f. Command Delay PWS Comma nd Dela y

474



9.41. Simatic S5 3964R



Register

Type

Register

Register

Register

Type

Relay

Relay

Format

nnn mmm/nnn

Format

Range with the Register

nnn=0-255, data block: set 3 mmm=0-255, nn n=0-255


Data Size

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Block

nnn.b nnn=0-255, b=0-f, data block: set 3 b must be 0 mmm/nnn.b

mmm=0-255, nnn=0-255, b=0-f b must be 0

2 . The illus tration of the con nec tion: a . PWS-s eries to PLC

PWS-ser C T

3 . Communi catio n Format: Be fo re connection, pl p t mm unic ation parameters and the dip-s witch as below:


a.Comm

unication Format RS23 2

b.Station No. None


d.Transmission Format 8-Bits, EVEN, 1-Bit

PWS Setting

COM 1 o r CO M2 =RS 232


475


9.42. ic PPI

1 . The data for t and range the PLC registers whi

Word D ma of evice and Bit Device.

ch the AD P c an ac cre ss :

Register Type

Input Image

Input Image

Output Image

Output Image

Internal Bits

In ternal Bits

Format

IWn

IDn

QWn

QDn

MWnn

MDnn

Range with the

Register

n=0-14 n=0-12 n=0-14 n=0-12 nn=0-99 nn=0-97

Data Size

Word

Double Word

Word

Double Word

Word

Double Word

Special S

Ti mer Bit

Co unter Bit

Special Bit

Da ta Area Bit

Special M

SWnn nn=0-99

Special S

Special Bits

Special Bits

Special Bits

An alog input word

Analogoutputword

Data Area

Data Area

SDnn

SMWnnn

SMWnnn

SMDnnn

AIWnn

AQWnn

VWnnnn

VDnnnn nn=0-97 nnn=0-27 nnn=28-199 nnn=0-197 nn =0-30 nn=0-30 n nnn=0-9998 nnnn=0-9996

Data Area DBWnnnn nnnn=0-9998

**

AQW; SW;SD can’t used in CPU212 ,214


Relay

In put Image

Output Imag e

Internal Bit

In.b

Qn.b

Mnn.b n =0-15; b=0-7 n=0-15; b=0-7 nn=0-100;b=0-7

Tnnn

Cnnn

SMnnn.b

Vnnnn.b

Snn.b nnn=0-255 nnn=0-255 nnn=0-200 ;b=0-7 nnnn=0-999 ;b=0-7 nn=0-100; b=0-7

Word

Double Word

Word* read only

Word

Double Word

Word* read only

Word* read only

Wor d

Double Word

Word

Block

b=0 e.g. I3.0 b=0 e.g. Q2.0 b=0 e.g. M0.0 b=0 e.g.T0 *read only b=0 e.g.C0

*read only b=0 e.g. SM23.0 b=0 e.g. V2323.

0 b=0 e.g. S25.0

2. The illustration of the connection:PWS-series to PLC PROGRAM PORT of

(RS485 mode).

476



3. Communication Format: Before connection, please set up the communic ation nd itch as below:


a.Com

munication Format RS48 5

b.Station No. 02(02 -27)

c.Transmission Speed 9600 /19200bps

PWS Setting

COM2=RS23 422/4 85

1. RS485: Sets SW10=ON d.Transmiss

ion F ormat 8Bits , EVEN, 1-Bit

e.Comman

d Delay PWS Command Delay

**The communication mode of Si matic S7-200 Network is Token Ring structure and can exists in se veral majors. Under on-line,PC can download,upload to PLC.


477


9.43. Simatic S7-300 CP340

1 . The data for

Word Devic ma e a t and range o nd Bit Devic f e.

the PLC reg isters which the AD P c an ac cre ss :

Register Type

DBmmm.DBWnnnn


mmm=1-255 DBmmm.DBWnnnn is the address nnnn=0-8190 of a word locates at byte #nnnn and the byte following #nnnn of data block #3

DBmmm.DBDnnnn mmm=1-255 nnnn=0-8188

DBmmm.DBDnnnn is the address of a double-word locates at byte

#nnnn and the three bytes following #nnnn of data block

#mmm

** T he HMI can read up to 32Words in one read command.


DBmmm.DBXnnnn.

b mmm=1-255 nnnn=0-8191 b=0-7

DBmmm.DBXnnnn.b is the address of Bit #b of the word locates at byte #nnnn of data block

#mmm

Data Size

Word

Double

Word

Block

b=0

2. The illustration of the connection: a. PWS-series to PLC CP340 RS232C PORT

3. Communication Format: Before connect ion, please set up the communication parameters and th e d -switch as below:

Format

a .Communication

F ormat

PLC Setting PWS Setting

R 232=CP340 COM2=RS232/RS422/R S485

478


b.Station No.

RS422=CP340

RS485=CP340

None

c.Transmission

Speed

d.Transmission

Format

9600 /19200bps

8-Bits, EVEN, 1-Bit

e.FUNCTION BLOCK FB40,FB2,FB3,DB2,DB3 for

CP




1. Set SW5=OFF if parameters are

set in ADP

2. Set SW5=ON if parameters are set in the HMI


479


9.44. Simatic S7-300 (via MPI port)



Register

Type

Format Rang e with the

Register

Input Image

Input Image

IWn nnnn

IDn nnnn nnnnn =0-65534 nnnnn =0-65532

Output Image QWnnnnn nnnnn=0-65534

Output Image QDnnnnn nnnnn=0-65532

Device

Type /Aux.

Address

0 0

1 0

2

3

0

0

Data Size

R/W

Word 9

DWord

9

Word

9

9

DWord

VWnnnnn

VDnnnnn nnnnn=0-65532

7 0

DWord

9

9 0

DWord

9

10

11

0

0

9

DWord

9

Data Area

(DB10)

Data Area

(DB10)

Data Area

(DB10)

DBWnnnnn nnnnn=0-65534; the

Byte nnnnn & nnnnn+1 make DBWnnnnn

Data Area

(DB10)

Data Area

Data Area

DBmmm.DB

Wnnnnn

DBmmm.DB

Dnnnnn double word address, the DBWnnnn &

DBWnnnn+1 make

DBDnnnn mmm=1-255 nnnnn=0-65534 mmm=1-255 nnnnn=0-65532

Timer Tnnnnn nnnnn=0-65534

Counter Cnnnnn

**

Timer, Counter are read-only. nnnnn=0-65534

Relay Type Foramt Range with the

Relay

Input Image Innnnn.b nnnnn=0-65535; b=0-7

Output Image Qnnnnn.b nnnnn=0-65535; b=0-7

Bit Mnnn.b nnn=0-255; b=0-7

7 0

DWord

Device Type

/Aux.Address

0xC2 0-7

Word

9

Word 9

Bi t

9

BlockR/W

9

480


Relay Type Foramt


Range with the

Relay

Device Type

/Aux.Address

BlockR/W

Data Area Bit

(=DB10)

Data Area Bit

(=DB10)

Data Area Bit

7

DBXnnnn.b nnnnn=0-65535; b=0-7

DB10.DBXnnnnn.b is a bit address,

It is in #b bit of #nnnnn word with

DB10

DBmm.DBX

nnnn.b mm=1-31 nnnnn=0-65535; b=0-7

2 . The illu stratio n of the connection:

PWS-series to PLC MPI port (RS 485)




b.Station No. 2


d.Transmission Format 8-Bits, EVEN, 1-Bis

**Notes :

PWS Setting

COM1 or COM2=RS485

1. Cable is the same as Siemens S7 200 .

2.

The HM

PLC sta

I and PLC station tion.

are between 0 a nd 15. The HMI station is l ess than the

3.

When use the M acro, the SIZE of block move is limited within 10 words.

4.

ng r m ssage when remove the cable.


481


9.45. Simatic S7-300 MPI-Cable



Register

Type

Input Image

Input Image

Format

IWnnnnn

IDnnnnn

Range with the

Register

n nnnn=065534 n nnnn=065532

Output Image QWnnnnn nnnnn=0-65534

Output Image QDnnnnn nnnnn=0-65532

Device

Type /Aux.

Address

0 0

1

2

3

0

0

0

Data Size

R/W

Word 9

DWord

9

Word

9

9

DWord

Bits MWnnn

Data Area

(DB10)

Data Area

(D B10)

Dat a Area

(DB 10)

DBWnnnn n nn nnn=0-65534 nnnnn=0-65534; the

Byte nnnnn & nnnnn+1 make DBWnnnnn

0

9

DWord

9

VWnnn nn nnnnn= 0-65534

VDnnnnn nnnnn=0-65532 7 0

DWord

9

Data Area

(DB10)

7 0

DWord

9

Data Area

Data Area double word address, the DBWnnnn &

DBWnnnn+1 make

DBDnnnn

DBmmm .DB mmm=2-2 05

Wnnnnn nnnnn=065534

DBmmm.DB mm m=2-205

Dnnnnn nnnnn=0-65532

8 0

9 0

DWord

9


Register

Device Type

/Aux. Address

Block

R/W

Input Image Innnnn.b nnnnn=0-65535; b=0-7

Output Image Qnnnnn.b nnnnn=0-65535; b=0-7

Bit Mnnn.b nnn=0-65535; b=0-7 0xC2

Data Area Bit

(=DB10)

Data Area Bit

(=DB10)

7

DBXnnnn.b nnnnn=0-65535; b=0-7

0-7 Bit 9

482



DB10.DBX

nnnnn.b is a bit address,

It is in # b bit of #nnnnn word with

DB10

Da ta Area Bit DBmm.DBX

nnnn.b mm=2-26 n nnnn=0-65535; b=0-7

0xC5 0-7

9

2. The illustration of the connection: a. PWS-series to PLC MPI CABLE RS232C PORT MPI 6ES7-972-0CA21-

0XA0 b . PW S-series to PLC MPI CAB LE RS232C POR T HMI 6ES7-972-

0CA10-0X A0 c. Example of the connections between PWS & S7-300/400 CPU MPI port:


483


3. Communication Format: Before connection, parameters and the dip-switch as below:

please set up the communication


a.Communication

Format

MPI CABLE RS232

b.Station No. 02

c.Tansmission Speed 19200/38400 bps

COM1 or COM2=RS232

1. Set PLC Station = 02 in ADP

1. Set SW5 =OFF if parameters are set in

d.Tranmission Format 8-Bits, ODD, 1-Bit

e. Command Delay

f. DATA BLOCK

ADP

2. Set SW5=ON if parameters are set in the

DB10 for S7-300-CPU HMI

Set PWS Command Delay

484


9.46. Simatic S7-300 HMI-Cable



Register Type

Input Image

Input Image

Ou tput Image

Output Image

Bits

Bits

Fo rmat

IWnnnnn

IDnnnnn

QWnnnnn

QDnnnnn

MWnnn

MDnnn

Ra nge with the Reg ister

Timer Image

Tim er Image

Timer Image

Timer Image

Tnnnnn.10ms nnnnn=0-65534 length=2-523

Tnnnnn.100m

s nnnnn=0-65534 length=2-523

Tnnnnn.1s

Tnnnnn.10s nnnnn=0-65534 length=2-523 nnnnn=0-65534 length=2-523

Co unter Image Cnnnnn nnnn n=0-65534 length=2-523

DBmmm.DBWnnnn

mmm=2-205 n nnn n=0-65534 nnnn=0-65534; DBWnnnn is a wo rd address, th e Byte nnnn & nnnn+1 make DBWnnnn

DBmmm.DBDnnnn

n mmm=2-205 nnnn=0-65532

Data Area (DB10) DBW nnnnn nnnnn=0-65532;DBDnnnn is a double word address, the

DBWnnnn & DBWnnnn+1 make

DBDnnnn nnnnn=0-65534; DBWnnnnn is a word ad e

Data S ize

nnnnn=0-65534 length=2-523 Word nnnnn=0-65532 length=2-523 Double W ord nnnnn=0-65534 length=2-523 Word nnnnn=0-65532 length=2-523 Double Word nnnnn=0-65534 length=2-78 nnnnn=0-65532 length=2-78

Word

Double Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Double Word

Word

Data Area (DB10) DBDnnnnn

Data Area (DB10) VWnnnnn

Data Area (DB10) VDnnnnnn


nnnnn=0-65532; DBDnnnnn is a double word address, the


DBDnnnn

Double Word nnnnn=0-65534; VWnnnnn is a Wor d word address, the Byte nnnnn & nnnnn+1 make DBWnnnnn

Double Word nnnnn=0-65532; VDnnnnn is a double wor d address, the


DBDnnnn


Input Image Innnnn.b

Output Image Qnnnnn.b

Range with the

Relay

nnnnn=0-65535; b=0-

7

Block

b=0 e.g. I3.0 nnnnn=0-65535; b=0b=0 e.g. Q2.0


485



Relay

7

Block

7

Data Area Bit D Bmm.D

BXnnnnn .

m mm=2-26 b nnnnn=0-65535 ;b=0-

7

0.0

Data Area Bit

(=DB10)

DBXnnnnn.b nnnnn=0-65535 b=0 e.g. DBX23.0

7

DBX23.0=DB10.DBX23.

0

Data Area Bit Vnnnnn.

b nn

7 nnn=0-65535; b=0b=0 e.g.

V23.0

(=DB10) DB10.DBXnnnnn.b is a Bit address, It is in

#b Bit of #nnnnn word with DB10

V23.0=D B10.D

BX23.0

2. The illustration of the connection: PWS and HMI 6ES7-972-0CA10-0XA0 RS232.



a.Communication Format HMI CABLE RS232

b.Node Address 02

c.Transmission Speed 9600/19200/38400 bps

d.Transmission Format 8-Bits, ODD, 1-Bit Set PWS Command Delay

e. OPEN DATA BLOCK DB block for S7-300-CPU

COM2=RS232

486



9.4

7. Taian TP01

1. The da ta format and range of the PLC registers which the ADP can accress :


Register Type

Input Register

Output Register

Special Register

Constant Register

Data Register

Relay Type

Format

WXnn

WYnn

WSnn

WCnnn

Vnnnn

Format

Range with the

Register

nn=1-24 nn=1-27 nn=1-40 nnn=1-512 nnnn=1-1024

Block

Data Size

W ord(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Input Relay

Output Relay

Auxiliary Relay

Xnnn

Ynnn

Cnnnn

Range with the

Relay

nnn=1-384 nnn=1-384 nnnn=1-1024

Must be multiple of16 +1

Must be multiple of 16+1

Must be multiple of 16+1






b.Station No. 0


d.Transmission Format 8-Bits, ODD, 1-Bit

PWS Setting

COM1 or COM2=RS232


487


9.48. TAIAN TP02



Register Type

Input

Output

Auxiliary Register

Auxiliary Register

System Register

Auxiliary Relay

Register

F ormat

Xnnn

Y nnn

V nnnn

D nnnn

WSnnn

C nnnn

Ra nge with the Re gister

Constant Register

Relay Type

WCnnn nnn=1-912

F ormat Range with the Relay

Input X nn n=1-384

Output Y nnn=1-384

Auxiliary Relay

Special Relay

Cnnnn

SCnnn nnnn=1-2048 nnn=1-128

Da ta Size

nnn=1-369(must be 1 or multiple of

16 +1) nnn=1-369(must be 1 or multiple of

16 +1)

Word

Word nnnn=1-1024 nn nn=1-1024

Word

Word nn n=1-128 Word nnnn=1-2048(must be 1 or multiple Word of 16+1)

Word

2. The illustration of the connection: a. PWS-s eries to PLC RS422 PORT of TP02

b.PWS-series to PLC RS485

PORT of TP02



a.Communication Format RS422/485

PWS Setting

b.Station No.


01

19200 bps

1. PLC Station =01

d.Transmission Format 7-Bits, EVEN , 2-Bits

[Note] : The above-mentioned “PLC Setting” is ADP default, please refer to PLC manul.

To set up WS041,WS042,WS044,WS045.

WS041---SET RS422 BAUD RATE,DATA bit，PARRITY,STOP bit

488



WS042---SET RS422 STATION NUMBER

WS044---SET RS485 BAUD RATE,DATA bit,PARRITY,STOP bit

W S045---SET RS485 STATION NUMBER

If T P02 PLC RS422 Port station no.=01→ W S042 sets 01(decimal), transmission speed

(19200 bps) and tansmission format (7bits,EVEN,2 bits) → WS041 sets 0120(decimal).


489


9.49. TAIAN N2



Register Type

Function

Format

Fnn n

Range with the

Register

nnn = 0 -125

D ata Size

Word(16 Bits)

2 . The illustration of the connectio n: a . PWS-series to N 2 (R S232)

Must use TAIAN’s “FA

-RS -232-N2

” cab le b . PWS-serie s

to N2 (R S485 )

Must use TAIAN’ s “FA-RS-485-KN” canble ,and the connection as be low.

3. Communication Format: Before connection, please set up the communication parameters a nd the dipswitch as bel ow:


a.Communication

Format

R S232 C

RS485


RS485=1


d.Transmission Format RS232C =7 Bits,odd,1 Bits

4 . Notes:

1.

Must use unsigned binary object.

2. Even though the F125 can be choosed but it can't be used. (Display 33333)

3. F0， F21， F42， F63， F84， F105 are

quick read/write start position.

(

BLOCK SIZE are 21, 21, 21, 21, 21, 23.)

4. “

33333 ” represents the Function is reserve.

5. In Fun

6. If edit ction table and the Format, the F unction value with “*” can not be changed.

a double word object, its value is compose d of nearby two functions.(Don’t use)

490



7. Please adjust the value of PWS : Command Delay (block read displays 0020 error message)

8.

Object's integer,decimal,d ig it must corres pond with practical c ondition

Object,integer,decimal,digit must correspond with re al ity(unsigne d binary object )(refer to the user manual)


491


9.50. Telemecanique TSX MICRO



Register Type Format R ange with the Register Data Size

Internal Word Wnnnn n nnn=0-9999 Word

**

The HMI can read up to 60Words in one read command. PLC Denotation:

%MWnnnn.


Bit of Internal Word Wnnnn:bb nnnn=0-9999; bb=0-15 bb=00 e.g.

W0:0

Note: The writing unit f

Note: When HMI changes a relay’s state, th e HMI must read 1 word (16 bits).

After change the corresponging bit , then the HMI will write the word in PLC. These actions will take more than one d other bit(Word) before the

HMI compeleted “Change the Relay”;otherwise, these bit(word) will retrun to initial value. In other words, th ed.

Fo r example: When the HMI changes W1234:7,the HMI must read the word from

W1234:0 toW1234:15. After cahne the bit7, then the HMI does not write in PLC, PL C ladd the HMI will write th er has changed W1234:0-W e word in PLC. If

1234:6 o r

W1234:8-W 1234-15. T re sumed.

The illustration of the connection:

Ex: a. COM Port to the RS-232 Port

R ange with the R elay Bloc k

b. COM Port to TER Port RS 485

492





a.Communication Format RS232/ RS485

b.Station No. 0—8; MASTER

c.Transmission Speed 9600bps/19200bps


PWS Setting

COM2=RS232/422/485

1. RS485:Set SW10=ON

1. Set PWS Station:1—8

SLAVE in ADP


493


9.51. Toshiba M20/M40



Register Type Format

Input Relay Register

Output Relay Register

XWnn

YW nn

Internal Relay Register RWnn

Link Register ZWnn

Timer Register

Counter Register

Tnn n

Cnn

Range with the

Register

nn=0-63 n n=0-63 nn=0-63 nn=0-31 n nn=0-127 nn=0-95

Data Register Dnnnn n nnn=0-1535

**

The HMI can read up to 32Words in on e read comma nd.

Relay Type Format R ange with the

Relay

Input Relay Xnnb n n=0-31；b=0 -f

Output Relay Ynnb n n=0-31；b=0-f

Internal Relay

Link Relay

Rnnb

Znnb nn=0-63；b=0-f nn=0-31；b=0-f

Data Size

Word

Word

Word

Word

Wo rd

Word

Word

Block

b=0 e.g

. X10 b=0 e.g

. Y00 b=0 e.g. R100 b=0 e.g. Z310

2. The illustration of t he conn ection: PW

PORT

S-series to PLC RS 422 C omputer Link

494





a.C

ommunication Format RS422 COM2=RS232/422/485

Programmer/computer link Computer link can be used 1. RS422: Set S W10=OFF


b.Station No. 0

c.Transmission Speed 9600bps

d.Transmission Format (8,E,1);(8,O,1); (8,N,1)


495


9.52. Toshiba T1/T2




Register

External input regi ster

Direct input registe r

Direct output register OWnn

Auxiliary relay register RWnnn nn=0-63

Output relay register YW nn nn=0-63 nn=0-63 nn=0-63

Special register

Timer register

SW nnn

Tnnn nnn=0-127 nnn=0-255 nnn=0-255

Counter register

Data register

Cn nn

Dnnnn nnn= 0-255 nnnn=0-4095

Data Size

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Link register

Link relay register

W nnnn

External input device Xnn b

External output de vice

Direct input device

Ynn b

Innb

Direct output devic e On nb

Auxiliary relay dev ice nn

Special device

Timer device

Counter device

Link device

Snnnb

T.nnn

C.nnn

Znnnb nnnn =0-1023 nnn= 0-255

Word

Word

Word File register

* *

The HMI can rea d up to 32W ords in one rea d command.

Fn nnn nnnn =0-1023


n n=0-63; b= hex number 0-f b=0 e.g. X10 nn= 0-63; b= 0-f nn=0-63; b= 0-f nn =0-63; b= 0-f b=0 b=0 b=0 e.g.

Y00 nnn=0 -127; b= 0-f nnn=0-255; b= 0-f nnn=0-255 nnn=0-255 nnn=0-511; b= 0-f b=0 e.g.

R100 b=0 e.g. S230 b=0 e.g. Z30

Link relay Lnnn b nnn=0-255; b= 0-f b=0 e.g

. L2550

2. The illustration of the conne ction:PWS COM Port to T1 CPU Serial Port

496





a.Co

mmunication

Format

RS232 COM1/CO

b.Station No. 0 ==T1

c.T

ransmission Speed 9600bps

M2=RS232

1. Set PLC station 00 in ADP

1. Set SW5=OFF if paramete rs are

d.Tranmission Format 8-Bits,ODD,1-Bit set in ADP

2. Set SW5=ON if parameters are

set in ADP


497


9.53. Unidriver UD70


Word Device and Bit Device

Register Type

Data Register


#70.00~#70.99 W 0 ~ W 198

#71.00~#71.99 W 200 ~ W 398

#72.00~#72.99 W 400 ~ W 598

#73.00~#73.99 W 600 ~ W 798

#18.01~#18.30 W 800 ~ W 858

#19.01~#19.30 W 860 ~ W 918

#20.01~#20.50 W 920 ~ W1018

#91.01~#91.10 W1020 ~ W1029

Relay Type

Bit Relay

Fotrmat Range with the Relay Block

#18.31~#18.50 B0 ~ B19

#19.31~#19.50 B20 ~ B39


Data Size

Word(32

Bits)

Word(32

Bits)

Word(32

Bits)

Word(32

Bits)

Word(32

Bits)

Word(32

Bits)

Word(32

Bits)

Word(16

Bits)




b.Station No. Set the parameter of

UD70 address#14.01 to

11

498


PWS Setting

RS485

1. Set PLC Station =11 in ADP


d.Transmission Format 7-Bits, Even , 1-Bit

e.Mode Set the parameter of

UD70 address#14.02 to

06



499


9.54. VIGOR M



Register Type

Input Relay

Output Relay

Auxiliary Relay

Step Relay

Special Relay

Data

Special Data

Timer Register

Counter Register

Counter Register

Relay Type

Input Relay

Format

Xnnn

Ynnn

Mnnnn

Snnn

Mnnnn

Dnnnn

Dnnnn

Tnnn

Cnnn

Cnnn

Format

Xnnn


nnn=0-777,oct, 0 or multiple of 8 nnn=0-777,oct, 0 or multiple of 8 nnnn=0-5119 0 or multiple of

8 nnn=0-999 0 or multiple of

8

Nnnn=9000-9255 0 or multiple of 8 nnn= 0-8191 nnnn= 9000-9255

Byte

Byte

Byte

Byte

Byte

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits) nnn= 0-255 nnn= 0-199 nnn= 200-255

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Word(32 Bits)

Range with the

Relay

nnn= 0-777, Oct

Block

Output Relay

Auxiliary Relay

ST1 Status

Special Relay

Timer Relay

Counter Relay

Timer Coil

Counter Coil

Ynnn

Mnnnn

Snnn

Mnnnn

Tnnn

Cnnn

TCnnn

CCnnn nnn= 0-777, Oct nnnn=0-5119 nnn= 0-999 nnnn=9000-9255 nnn= 0-255 nnnn=0-255 nnn= 0-255 nnn= 0-255











500


a. PWS-series to PLC RS422 PORT

Use a VIGOR with 4-pin male




a.Communication Format RS232C,RS422


RS422=1



PWS Setting

RS232C=0

RS422=1


501


9.55. YOKOGAWA FA-M3



Register

Type

Foramt Range with the Register Data Size

Input Relay

Output Relay

Xnnnnn nnnnn= 201-65499(not continue)

Ynnnnn nnnnn= 201-65499(not continue)

Intern Relay Innnnn nnnnn= 1-16384

Common Relay Ennnn nnnn= 1-4096

Link Relay Lnnnnn nnnnn= 1-65499(not continue)

Special Relay Mnnnn nnnn= 1-9984

Preset Timer TPnnnn nnnn= 1-3072

Set Timer TSnnnn nnnn= 1-3072

Preset Counter CPnnnn nnnn= 1-3072

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Set Counter CSnnnn nnnn= 1-3072

Data Register Dnnnn nnnn= 1-8192

File Register

Link Register

Bnnnnn nnnnn= 1-32768

Wnnnn nnnnn= 1-65499(not continue)

Znnn nnn= 1-512 Special

Register

Index Register Vnn nn= 1-64

Relay Type Foramt Range with the Relay

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Word(16 Bits)

Common

Register

Rnnnn nnnn= 1-4096 Word(16 Bits)

[Note 1] The last two digits of X and Y addresses must be multiple of 16 +1.

I,E,L,M addresses must be multiple of 16 +1.

[Note 2] One communication is up to READ/WRITE 60 words.

Data Size

Bit Iuput Relay

Output Relay

Xnnnnn nnnnn= 201-65499(not continue)

Ynnnnn nnnnn= 201-65499(not continue)

Intern RELAY Innnnn

Common RELAY Ennnn nnnn= 1-16384 nnnn= 1-4096

Link RELAY Lnnnnn nnnn= 1-65499

Special RELAY Mnnnn nnnn= 1-9984

Timer TUnnnn nnnn= 1-3072

Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

Bit

Example

X00201

Y00201

I00001

E0001

L00001

M0001

TP0001

TS0001

CP0001

CS0001

D0001

B00001

W00001

Z001

V01

R0001

502



Counter CUnnnn nnnn= 1-3072 Bit

[Note 1] The last two digits of X,Y,L addresses must be multiple of 16 +1.

I,E,M addresses must be multiple of 16 +1.

2. The illustration of the connection: a. PWS-series to PLC RS232 PORT must use YOKOGAWA’s CABLE. See below. b. PWS-series to PLC RS485 communication mode


Format

a.Communication

Format

PLC Setting

RS232C/ RS485

PWS Setting


RS485=1


RS232C=1(based on cpu slot 1-4)

RS485 =1

d.Transmission Format 8 Bits,even,1 Bit

[Note1] PWS station no. must match YOKOGAWA PLC CPU slot no. If CPU plugs in the 1st slot , the PWS station no. must set “1”.


503

Appendix A.

Appendix A. – Table of the ADP 6.0 Features and HMI Models

HMI Models

ADP Features

The following is the table of the ADP 6.0 features and HMI models. The functions which are not included represents applicable on all HMI models.

PWS3261

PWS3261 PWS3261N

PWS6300

PWS6300 PWS6600

PWS6600

1

PWS6600N PWS6600N-Color

Ethernet

Printer

Upload Application

Upload/Download Recipes

Reconstruct Source

Auxiliary Keys

True Type

Contrast Adjustment

Turn off Backlight

Set Time & Date

Name/Select Recipe

Print Report

Run Application

State and Text

Management

×

○

○

○

○

×

×

○

○

○

×

×

×

×

○

○

○

○

○

×

×

○

○

○

×

×

×

×

×

×

○

×

○

○

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○

○

×

×

×

×

○

○

○

×

○

○

○

PWS6600-

Color

×

○

○

○

○

○

×

○

○

○

×

×

×

×

○

○

○

○

○

○

×

○

○

○

×

×

×

×

○

○

○

○

○

○

×

○

○

○

×

×

×

×

Character Entry

List and Drop-down List

Numeric Display

Time, Date and Date-of – week Display

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

×

×

×

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

Historical Display

Alarm Display

Macro

Ladder

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

×

×

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

SoftPanel

2

SoftPanel

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

×

○

○

×

×

○

○

○

×

×

×

○

○

○

○

1

The Function of AP1600C and AP1600S are the same as PWS6600C and PWS6600S.

2

SoftPanel includes 640×480、800×600 and 1024×768 .


Appendix A.

ADP Model

ADP Function

Multi-Link

(One master, Slaves)

Cross-Link

(Mutual Read)

Multi-Channel

Communication

Logging Buffer

Common Key

Slide-out Menu

System Messages

Report Format

Off-line/On-line

Simulation

View/Edit Recipes

PWS3261

PWS3261 PWS3261N

PWS6300

PWS6300

○

×

○

○

×

×

○

×

○

○

○

○

○

○

×

×

○

×

○

○

Slave

×

×

×

○

×

○

×

○

×

PWS6600

○

○

○

○

×

○

○

○

×

○

○

○

○

○

×

○

○

PWS6600-

Color

○

PWS6600

3

PWS6600N PWS6600N-Color

SoftPanel

4

SoftPanel

○ ○ ○

×

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

×

○

○

○

○

○

○

×

○

○

○

○

×

○

○

○

○

3

The function of AP1600C 、AP1600S are the same as PWS6600C and PWS6600S .

4

SoftPanel includes 640×480、800×600 and 1024×768.

2 ADP User’s Manual

Appendix B.

Appendix B. – PWS6600 External Key (Network and Enhanced model)

A user can operate PWS6600 (Network and Enhanced model) through external key and designs a customized control key panel based on the

application required.

1. The illustration of wiring

PWS6600 (Network and Enhanced model) Printer/Keyboard connector can link with printer or external keyboard. See below. When the connector is linked to external keyboard, a user must notice the position of JP3,JP4 and JP5 jumper (must be set as the factory default position).

Appendix B. -Figure 1. The Illustration of PWS6600 Connection

ADP User’s Manual B-1

Appendix B.

When the connector is linked to the external keyboard, the position of JP3,

JP4 and JP5 jumper must set as above Figure. Otherwise, the external keyboard can not work normally.

When the connector is linked to the printer (for most printers), the position of JP3, JP4 and JP5 jumper does not need to change. Besides, the connector must be linked to printer through the convert cable (included in package).

2. Wiring

The PWS6600 is up to 8

×8=64 external keys. Please adjust the number of external key based on demands. The following Figure is the connection definition for external key.

Appendix B - Figure 2. The Illustration of PWS6600 Wiring

B-2 ADP User’s Manual

Appendix B.

3.

Definition

In ADP 6.0, K00-K77 keys are defined by the connection order. The following is the mapping table of Keyboard connector and ADP definition.

K00-K31 can be defined by user in ADP. K32-K77 are specific functional keys reserved for system.

PDO0

PDO1

PDO2

PDO3

PDO4

PDO5

PDO6

PDO7

PDI0 PDI1 PDI2 PDI3 PDI4 PDI5 PDI6 PDI7

K00 K10 K20 K30 K40

K01 K11 K21 K31 K41

K02 K12 K22 K32 K42

K03 K13 K23 K33

K03 K14 K24 K34

K05 K15 K25 K35

K06 K16 K26 K36

K07 K17 K27 K37

K43

K44

K45

K46

K47

K50

K51

K52

K53

K54

K55

K56

K57

K60

K61

K62

K63

K64

K65

K66

K67

Appendix B-Figure 3. The Definition of PWS6600’s External keys

∗

PDO0...PDO7 and PDI0...PDI7 are Keyboard connector.

∗

K00...K77 is defined in ADP.

PWS6600 (Network and Enhanced model) reads the commands from the external key by 8 x 8 matrix scan. Due to no protection with some

PWS6600 electronic lines, please notice the instruments around .And

PWS6600 PCB may be severely damaged by excess noise, static and leakage. Bedsides, please notice the length of wiring can not exceed 50 cm.

K70

K71

K72

K73

K74

K75

K76

K77

PDO0

In ADP6.0, some functional keys are reserved for system including numeric entry, alarm, historical data scrolling functions…etc. User can use those keys to easily design screen layout. Figure 4 is the definition of K32-K77

1.

2.

[Up], [Down], [Left], [Right]: Move the selected object.

[0]-[9], [A]-[F],[.],[-]: Numeric keys.

3.

4.

[BS]: Back Space ; [Esc]: Cancel

[V..Home], [V..PgUp], [V..Up], [V..Dn], [V..PgDn],

[V..End],[H..Home],[H..End]:The scrolling function for alarm and

5. historical object.

[CLR]: Clear the alarm and historical data.


Appendix B.

PDO1

PDO2

PDO3

PDO4

PDO5

PDO6

PDO7

7 8 9 V_Home

4 5 6 V_PgUp

K32 K42 K52 K62 K72

H_PgRt 1 2 3 V_Up

K33 K43 K53 K63 K73

H_Rt . 0 - V_Dn

K34 K44 K54 K64 K74

H_Lt BS ↑ ↵ V_PgDn

K35 K45 K55 K65 K75

H_PgLt ← ↓ → V_End

K36 K46 K56 K66 K76

ESC A B C H_Home

K37 K47 K57 K67 K77

CLR D E F H_End

Appendix B-Figure 4. The Definition of PWS6600’s Reserved Keys

All the PWS6600 external keys can be edited in ADP 6.0. There are two types of external keys provided :

Note: If a key is defined repeatedly in the same screen, the first priority will be the definition of auxiliary keys .

(1) Common Keys

Common key has the same function on any screens (under

auxiliary keys w/o setup condition). For example, set “K00” as go to the 1st screen; press “K00” on any screen will go to the 1st screen.

If the definition of external keys is common for the ADP application, a user can use [Common Keys] to define its function conveniently instead of repeated definition for each screen. Select

[Application]/[Common Keys], the dialog box will offer the functions for the selected model (PWS6600). See below.


Appendix B.

Appendix B-Figure 3. The [Common Keys] Dialog box

(PWS6600)

(2) Auxiliary Keys

Auxiliary Key is only applicable on the current page. For example, if K00” is set to go to the page 1 on the page 5, It will go to page 1 by pressing "K00" on page 5 and not for other pages. Auxiliary Key is only applicable on the current screen.

To design external keys only applicable on the current screen, a user must use [Auxiliary Keys] on the screen. Select [Screen]

/[Properties], it will offer the functions for the selected model

(PWS6600) in the [Auxiliary Keys] tab. See below.


Appendix B.

Appendix B-Figure 4. The [Auxiliary Keys] Dialog Box

(PWS6600)
